Communication system
Claim Score by NHIP
Abstract
At the transmitter side, carrier waves are modulated according to an input signal for producing relevant signal points in a signal space diagram. The input signal is divided into, two, first and second, data streams. The signal points are divided into signal point groups to which data of the first data stream are assigned. Also, data of the second data stream are assigned to the signal points of each signal point group. A difference in the transmission error rate between first and second data streams is developed by shifting the signal points to other positions in the space diagram expressed at least in the polar coordinate system. At the receiver side, the first and/or second data streams can be reconstructed from a received signal. In TV broadcast service, a TV signal is divided by a transmitter into low and high frequency band components which are designated as first and second data streams respectively. Upon receiving the TV signal, a receiver can reproduce only the low frequency band component or both the low and high frequency band components, depending on its capability. Furthermore, a communication system based on an OFDM system is utilized for data transmission of a plurality of subchannels, wherein the subchannels are differentiated by changing the length of a guard time slot or a carrier wave interval of a symbol transmission time slot, or changing the transmission electric power of the carrier.

Term
Term ended
Expired 5 October 2020, 6 years ago.
- Priority
- Filed
- Granted
- Expired
- Today
18 claims: 10 independent, 8 dependent
- 1A signal transmission and reception apparatus for transmitting and receiving an n-level VSB signal, the apparatus comprising a transmitter and a receiver; said transmitter comprising:a compression means for comprising an input video signal to a digital video compression signal;an error correction encoding means for adding an error correction code to the digital video compression signal to produce an error correction coded signal;a modulation means for modulating the error correction coded signal to an n-level VSB modulating signal, said modulation means comprising a means for allocating code points along a uniaxial modulation coordinated system, and a filter means having a plurality of coefficients which are a series of impulse responses defined by plotting timebase responses to the VSB modulation signal along the in-phase axis and its orthogonal axis for filtering a series of said code points allocated along the uniaxial modulation coordinate system;and a transmission means for transmitting the modulation signal, and said receiver comprising: a means for receiving a transmitted n-level VSB modulation signal;a demodulation means for demodulating the received n-level VSB modulation signal into a digital reception signal;an error correction means for error correcting the digital reception signal to obtain an error-corrected digital signal;and an expanding means for expanding the error-corrected digital signal to obtain a video output signal.
- 8A signal transmission and reception apparatus for transmitting an n-level VSB signal, comprising:a compression means for comprising an input video signal into a digital video compression signal;an error correction encoding means for adding an error correction code to the digital video compression signal to produce an error correction coded signal;a modulation means for modulating the error correction coded signal to an n-level VSB modulation signal, said modulation means comprising a means for allocating coded points along a uniaxial modulation coordinate system, and a filter means having a plurality of coefficients which are a series of impulse responses defined by plotting timebase responses to the VSB modulation signal along the in-phase axis and its orthogonal axis for filtering a series of said code points allocated along the uniaxial modulation coordinate system;and a transmission means for transmitting the modulation signal.
- 10A signal receiving apparatus comprising:a tuner for receiving a transmission signal containing a digital modulation signal and an analog modulation signal and for selecting the digital modulation signal using a local oscillation signal;an interference detecting means for detecting interference caused by the analog modulation signal from the digital modulation signal selected by the tuner;a notch filter means responsive to the interference detected by the interference detecting means for removing a carrier of the analog modulation signal in a same frequency band as a frequency band of the digital modulation signal;an error ratio calculating means for calculating a bit error ratio of an output of the notch filter means;and an automatic frequency correcting means for changing a frequency of the local oscillation signal of the tuner according to a level of the interference detected by the interference detecting means and the bit error ratio calculated by the error ratio calculating means to compensate for a frequency offset of the carrier of the analog modulated signal.
- 12A signal receiving apparatus comprising:a tuner for receiving a transmission signal containing at least one of a VSB modulated signal and a QAM modulated signal and for selecting one of the VSB modulated signal and the QAM modulated signal to obtain a selected signal;an analog-to-digital converter for converting the selected signal into a series of digital codes;a transversal filter provided on an orthogonal axis for suppressing a transmission distortion of the series of digital codes with respect to both orthogonal axes to obtain a series of filtered digital codes allocated on the orthogonal axes;a carrier recovery means for phase-compensating a carrier of the filtered digital codes allocated on the orthogonal axis outputted from the transversal filter;and a control means for producing a control signal to extract detected codes at equal time intervals from the VSB modulated signal;a clock reproducing means for phase synchronizing entire codes of the QAM modulated signal when the selected signal is the QAM modulated signal and for phase synchronizing codes of the VSB modulated signal intermittently at predetermined intervals when the selected signal is the VSB modulated signal;and a decoding means for decoding an output of the carrier recovery means.
- 13A signal transmission apparatus for transmitting a first data stream and a second data stream, comprising:a modulator operable to assign each of the first and second data streams to a respective constellation in a vector space diagram to produce modulated signals wherein the number of signal points of the constellation for the first data stream is different from the number of signal points of the constellation for the second data stream, and a transmitter operable to transmit the modulated signals, wherein the first data stream has a synchronization data and data for demodulation for demodulating the modulated signals corresponding to the second data stream, and wherein the synchronization data is located at the beginning of the first data stream, and the data for demodulation follows the synchronization data.
- 14A signal receiving apparatus comprising:a receiver operable to receive a transmitted signal to produce a received signal, the received signal having information of a first data steam and a second data stream, wherein each data stream is assigned to a respective constellation in a vector space diagram, the number of signal points of the constellation for the first data stream is different from the number of signal points of the constellation for the second data stream, and wherein the first data stream has a synchronization data and data for demodulation for demodulating the received signal corresponding to the second data stream, the synchronization data is located at the beginning of the first data stream, and the data for demodulation follows the synchronization data;and a demodulator operable to demodulate the received signal to produce the first data stream and the second data stream, wherein said demodulator produces the second data stream according to the data for demodulation.
- 15A signal transmission system comprising a signal transmission apparatus and a signal receiving apparatus, said signal transmission apparatus for transmitting a first data stream and a second data stream, comprising:a modulator operable to assign each of the first and second data streams to a respective constellation in a vector space diagram to produce modulated signals wherein the number of signal points of the constellation for the first data stream is different from the number of signal points of the constellation for the second data stream, and a transmitter operable to transmit the modulated signals, wherein the first data stream has a synchronization data and data for demodulation for demodulating the modulated signals corresponding to the second data stream, and wherein the synchronization data is located at the beginning of the first data stream, and the data for demodulation follows the synchronization data;said signal receiving apparatus, comprising: a receiver operable to receive a transmitted signal to produce a received signal;and a demodulator operable to demodulate the received signal to produce the first data stream and the second data stream, wherein said demodulator produces the second data stream according to the data for demodulation.
- 16Broadest claimClaim Score 63, broad(NHIP)A signal transmission method for transmitting a first data stream and a second data stream, comprising:assigning each of the first and second data streams to a respective constellation in a vector space diagram to produce modulated signals wherein the number of signal points of the constellation for the first data stream is different from the number of signal points of the constellation for the second data stream, and transmitting the modulated signals, wherein the first data stream has a synchronization data and data for demodulation for demodulating the modulated signals corresponding to the second data stream, and wherein the synchronization data is located at the beginning of the first data stream, and the data for demodulation follows the synchronization data.
- 17A signal receiving method comprising:receiving a transmitted signal to produce a received signal, the received signal having information of a first data stream and a second data stream, wherein each data stream is assigned to a respective constellation in a vector space diagram, the number of signal points of the constellation for the first data stream is different from the number of signal points of the constellation for the second data stream, and wherein the first data stream has a synchronization data and data for demodulation for demodulating the received signal corresponding to the second data stream, the synchronization data is located at the beginning of the first data stream, and the data for demodulation follows the synchronization data;and demodulating the received signal to produce the first data stream and the second data stream, wherein said demodulating produces the second data stream according to the data for demodulation.
- 18A signal transmission and receiving method comprising a signal transmission method and a signal receiving method, said signal transmission method for transmitting a first data stream and a second data stream, comprising:assigning each of the first and second data streams to a respective constellation in a vector space diagram to produce modulated signals wherein the number of signal points of the constellation for the first data stream is different from the number of signal points of the constellation for the second data stream, and transmitting the modulated signals, wherein the first data stream has a synchronization data and data for demodulation for demodulating the modulated signals corresponding to the second data stream, and wherein the synchronization data is located at the beginning of the first data stream, and the data for demodulation follows the synchronization data;said signal receiving method, comprising: receiving a transmitted signal to produce a received signal, demodulating the received signal to produce the first data stream and the second data stream, wherein said demodulating produces the second data stream according to the data for demodulation.
Independent claims10
651 paragraphs in 14 sections, as filed
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
0001This application is a continuation-in-part of application Ser. No. <b>07</b>/<b>857</b>,<b>627</b>, filed Mar. <b>25</b>, <b>1992</b>, pending.
0002This is a reissue application of U.S. Pat. No. <b>5</b>,<b>600</b>,<b>672</b>, issued Feb. <b>4</b>, <b>1997</b>, and a divisional application of reissue application Ser. No. <b>09</b>/<b>244</b>,<b>037</b>, filed Feb. <b>4</b>, <b>1999</b>, which is also a reissue application of U.S. Pat. No. <b>5</b>,<b>600</b>,<b>672</b>, issued Feb. <b>4</b>, <b>1997</b> which is a Continuation-In-Part of application Ser. No. <b>07</b>/<b>857</b>,<b>627</b>, filed Mar. <b>25</b>, <b>1992</b> now abandoned. Further reissue divisional applications have been filed, all of which are reissues of U.S. Pat. No. <b>5</b>,<b>600</b>,<b>672</b>. These further applications are: <b>09</b>/<b>677</b>,<b>421</b>, filed Oct. <b>5</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>678</b>,<b>014</b>, filed Oct. <b>5</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>677</b>,<b>420</b>, filed Oct. <b>5</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>680</b>,<b>177</b>, filed Oct. <b>5</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>680</b>,<b>176</b>, filed Oct. <b>5</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>686</b>,<b>467</b>, filed Oct. <b>12</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>686</b>,<b>463</b>, filed Oct. <b>12</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>686</b>,<b>466</b>, filed Oct. <b>12</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>688</b>,<b>028</b>, filed Oct. <b>12</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>686</b>,<b>464</b>, filed Oct. <b>12</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>686</b>,<b>465</b>, filed Oct. <b>12</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>666</b>,<b>012</b>, filed Sep. <b>19</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>667</b>,<b>525</b>, filed Sep. <b>21</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>667</b>,<b>438</b>, filed Sep. <b>21</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>668</b>,<b>068</b>, filed Sep. <b>25</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>669</b>,<b>916</b>, filed Sep. <b>25</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>672</b>,<b>948</b>, filed Sep. <b>29</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>672</b>,<b>946</b>, filed Sep. <b>29</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>09</b>/<b>672</b>,<b>947</b>, filed Sep. <b>29</b>, <b>2000</b>; <b>10</b>/<b>133</b>,<b>347</b>, filed Apr. <b>29</b>, <b>2002</b>; <b>10</b>/<b>133</b>,<b>364</b>, filed Apr. <b>29</b>, <b>2002</b>; <b>10</b>/<b>692</b>,<b>469</b>, filed Oct. <b>24</b>, <b>2003</b>; <b>10</b>/<b>693</b>,<b>526</b>, filed Oct. <b>27</b>, <b>2003</b>; <b>10</b>/<b>635</b>,<b>468</b>, filed Aug. <b>7</b>, <b>2003</b>; <b>10</b>/<b>690</b>,<b>297</b>, filed Oct. <b>27</b>, <b>2003</b>; <b>10</b>/<b>860</b>,<b>666</b>, filed Jun. <b>4</b>, <b>2004</b>; <b>10</b>/<b>782</b>,<b>411</b>, filed Feb. <b>20</b>, <b>2004</b>; <b>10</b>/<b>783</b>,<b>588</b>, filed Feb. <b>23</b>, <b>2004</b>; <b>10</b>/<b>773</b>,<b>811</b>, filed Feb. <b>9</b>, <b>2004</b>; <b>10</b>/<b>882</b>,<b>126</b>, filed Jun. <b>30</b>, <b>2004</b>; <b>10</b>/<b>885</b>,<b>572</b>, filed Jul. <b>7</b>, <b>2004</b>; and <b>10</b>/<b>911</b>,<b>680</b>, filed Aug. <b>5</b>, <b>2004</b>; and <b>11</b>/<b>038</b>,<b>006</b>, fild Jan. <b>19</b>, <b>2006</b>.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
00031. Field of the Invention
0004The present invention relates to a communication system for transmission and reception of a digital signal through modulation of its carrier wave and demodulation of the modulated signal.
00052. Description of the Prior Art
0006Digital signal communication systems have been used in various fields. Particularly, digital video signal transmission techniques have been improved remarkably.
0007Among them is a digital TV signal transmission method. So far, such digital TV signal transmission systems are in particular use for transmission between TV stations. They will soon be utilized for terrestrial and/or satellite broadcast service in every country of the world.
0008The TV broadcast systems including HDTV, PCM music, FAX, and other information services are now demanded to increase desired data in quantity and quality for satisfying millions of sophisticated viewers. In particular, the data has to be increased in a given bandwidth of frequency allocated for TV broadcast service. The data to be transmitted is always abundant and provided as much as handled with up-to-date techniques of the time. It is ideal to modify or change the existing signal transmission system corresponding to an increase in the data amount with time.
0009However, the TV broadcast service is a public business and cannot go further without considering the interests and benefits of viewers. It is essential to have any new service compatible with existing TV receivers and displays. More particularly, the compatibility of a system is much desired for providing both old and new services simultaneously or one new service which can be intercepted by both the existing and advanced receivers.
0010It is understood that any new digital TV broadcast system to be introduced has to be arranged for data extension in order to respond to future demands and technological advantages and also, for compatibility to allow the existing receivers to receive transmissions.
0011The expansion capability and compatible performance of the prior art digital TV system will be explained.
0012A digital satellite TV system is known in which NTSC TV signals compressed to an about 6 Mbps are muitiplexedmultiplexed by time division modulation of 4 PSK and transmitted on 4 to 20 channels while HDTV signals are carried on a signal channel. Another digital HDTV system is provided in which HDTV video data compressed to as small as 15 Mbps are transmitted on a 16 or 32 QAM signal through ground stations.
0013Such a known satellite system permits HDTV signals to be carried on the channel by a conventional manner, thus occupying a band of frequencies equivalent to the same channels of NTSC signals. This causes the corresponding NTSC channels to be unavailable during the transmission of the HDTV signal. Also, the compatibility between NTSC and HDTV receivers or displays is hardly concerned and data expansion capability needed for matching a future advanced mode is utterly disregarded.
0014Such a common terrestrial HDTV system offers an HDTV service on conventional 16 or 32 QAM signals without any modification. In any analogue TV broadcast service, there are developed a lot of signal attenuating or shadow regions within its service area due to structural obstacles, geographical inconveniences, or signal interference from a neighbor station. When the TV signal is an analogue fromform, it can be intercepted more or less at such signal attenuating regions although its reproduced picture is low in quality. If the TV signal is a digital form, it can rarely be reproduced at an acceptable level within the regions. This disadvantage is critically hostile to the development of any digital TV system.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
0015It is an object of the present invention, for solving the foregoing disadvantages, to provide a communication system arranged for compatible use for both the existing NTSC and newly introduced HDTV broadcast services, particularly via satellite and also, for minimizing signal attenuating or shadow region of its service area on the groundsground.
0016A communication system according to the present invention intentionally varies signal points, which used to be disposed at uniform intervals, to perform the signal transmission and reception. For example, if applied to a QAM signal, the communication system comprises two major sections: a transmitter having a signal input circuit, a modulator circuit for producing m numbers of signal points, in a signal vector field through modulation of a plurality of out-of-phase carrier waves using an input signal supplied from the input circuit, and a transmitter circuit for transmitting a resultant modulated signal; and a receiver having an input circuit for receiving the modulated signal, a demodulator circuit for demodulating one-bit signal points of a QAM carrier wave, and an output circuit.
0017In operation, the input signal containing a first data stream of n values and a second data stream is fed to the modulator circuit of the transmitter where a modified m-bit QAM carrier wave is produced representing m signal points in a vector field. The m signal points are divided into n signal point groups to which the n values of the first data stream are assigned respectively. Also, data of the second data stream are assigned to m/n signal points or sub groups of each signal point group. Then, a resultant transmission signal is transmitted from the transmitter circuit. Similarly, a third data stream can be propagated.
0018At the p-bit demodulator circuit, p>m, of the receiver, the first data stream of the transmission signal ifis first demodulated through dividing p signal points in a signal space diagram into n signal point groups. Then, the second data stream is demodulated through assigning p/n values to p/n signal points of each corresponding signal point group for reconstruction of both the first and second data streams. If the receiver is at P=n, the n signal point groups are reclaimed and assigned the n values for demodulation and reconstruction of the first data stream.
0019Upon receiving the same transmission signal from the transmitter, a receiver equipped with a large sized antenna and capable of large-data modulation can reproduce both the first and second data streams. A receiver equipped with a small sized antenna and capable of small-data modulation can reproduce the first data stream only. Accordingly, the compatibility of the signal transmission system will be ensured. When the first data stream is an NTSC TV signal or low frequency band component of an HDTV signal and the second data stream is a high frequency band component of the HDTV signal, the small-data modulation receiver can reconstruct the NTSC TV signal and the large-data modulation receiver can reconstruct the HDTV signal. As understood, a digital NTSC/HDTV simultaneous broadcast service will be feasible using the compatibility of the signal transmission system of the present invention.
0020More specifically, the communication system of the present invention comprises: a transmitter having a signal input circuit, a modulator circuit for producing m signal point,points in a signal vector field through modulation of a plurality of out-of-phase carrier waves using an input signal supplied from the input, and a transmitter circuit for transmitting a resultant modulated signal, in which the main procedure includes receiving an input signal containing a first data stream of n values and a second data stream, dividing the m signal points of the signal into n signal point groups, assigning the n values of the first data stream to the n signal point groups respectively, assigning data of the second data stream to signal points of each signal point group respectively, and transmitting the resultant modulated signal; and a receiver having an input circuit for receiving the modulated signal, a demodulator circuit for demodulating p signal points of a QAM carrier wave, and an output circuit, in which the main procedure includes dividing the p signal points into n signal point groups, demodulating the first data stream of which n values are assigned to the n signal point groups respectively, and demodulating the second data stream of which p/n values are assigned to p/n signal points of each signal point group respectively. For example, a transmitter produces a modified m-bit QAM signal of which first, second, and third data streams, each carrying n values, are assigned to relevant signal point groups with a modulator. The signal can be intercepted and the first data stream only reproduced by a first receiver, both the first and second data streams can be reproduced by a second receiver, and all the first, second, and third streams can be reproduced by a third receiver.
0021More particularly, a receiver capable of demodulation of n-bit data can reproduce n bits from a multiple-bit modulated carrier wave carrying m-bit data where m>n, thus allowing the communication system to have compatibility and capability of future extension. Also, a multi-level signal transmission will be possible by shifting the signal points of QAM so that a nearest signal point to the origin point of I-axis and Q-axis coordinates is spaced nf from the origin where f is the distance of the nearest point from each axis and n is more than 1.
0022Accordingly, a compatible digital satellite broadcast service for both the NTSC and HDTV systems will be feasible when the first data stream carries an NTSC signal and the second data stream carries a difference signal between NTSC and HDTV. Hence, the capability of corresponding to an increase in the data amount to be transmitted will be ensured. Also, on the ground, the service area will be increased while signal attenuating areas are decreased.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
0023<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref> is a schematic view of the entire arrangement of a signal transmission system showing a first embodiment of the present invention;
0024<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2</figref> is a block diagram of a transmitter of the first embodiment;
0025<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref> is a vector diagram showing a transmission signal of the first embodiment;
0026<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4</figref> is a vector diagram showing a transmission signal of the first embodiment;
0027<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref> is a view showing an assignment of binary codes to signal points according to the first embodiment;
0028<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 6</figref> is a view showing an assignment of binary codes to signal point groups according to the first embodiment;
0029<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 7</figref> is a view showing an assignment of binary codes to signal points in each signal point group according to the first embodiment;
0030<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 8</figref> is a view showing another assignment of binary codes to signal point groups and their signal points according to the first embodiment;
0031<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 9</figref> is a view showing threshold values of the signal point groups according to the first embodiment;
0032<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 10</figref> is a vector diagram of a modified 16 QAM signal of the first embodiment; <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 11</figref> is a graphic diagram showing the relationship between antenna radius r<sub>2 </sub>and transmission energy ratio n according to the first embodiment;
0033<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 12</figref> is view showing the signal points of a modified 64 QAM signal of the first embodiment;
0034<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 13</figref> is a graphic diagram showing the relationship between antenna radius r<sub>3 </sub>and transmission energy ratio n according to the first embodiment;
0035<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 14</figref> is a vector diagram showing signal point groups and their signal points of the modified 64 QAM signal of the first embodiment;
0036<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 15</figref> is an explanatory view showing the relationship between A<sub>1 </sub>and A<sub>2 </sub>of the modified 64 QAM signal of the first embodiment;
0037<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 16</figref> is a graph diagram showing the relationship between antenna radius r<sub>2 </sub>and r<sub>3 </sub>and transmission energy ratio n<sub>16 </sub>and n<sub>64 </sub>respectively according to the first embodiment;
0038<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 17</figref> is a block diagram of a digital transmitter of the first embodiment;
0039<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 18</figref> is a signal space diagram of a 4 PSK modulated signal of the first embodiment;
0040<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 19</figref> is a block diagram of a first receiver of the first embodiment;
0041<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 20</figref> is a signal space diagram of a 4 PSK modulated signal of the first embodiment;
0042<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 21</figref> is a block diagram of a second receiver of the first embodiment;
0043<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 22</figref> is a vector diagram of a modified 16 QAM signal of the first embodiment;
0044<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 23</figref> is a vector diagram of a modified 64 QAM signal of the first embodiment;
0045<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 24</figref> is a flowchart showing the operation of the first embodiment;
0046FIG. <b>25</b>(a) and <b>25</b>(b) are vector diagrams respectively showing an 8 and a 16 QAM signal of the first embodiment;
0047<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 26</figref> is a block diagram of a third receiver of the first embodiment;
0048<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 27</figref> is a view showing signal points of the modified 64 QAM signal of the first embodiment;
0049<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 28</figref> is a flowchart showing another the operation of the first embodiment;
0050<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 29</figref> is a schematic view of the entire arrangement of a signal transmission system showing a third embodiment of the present invention;
0051<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 30</figref> is a block diagram of a first video encoder of the third embodiment;
0052<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 31</figref> is a block diagram of a first video decoder of the third embodiment;
0053<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 32</figref> is a block diagram of a second video decoder of the third embodiment;
0054<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 33</figref> is a block diagram of a third video decoder of the third embodiment;
0055<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 34</figref> is an explanatory view showing a time multiplexing of D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>, and D<sub>3 </sub>signals according to the third embodiment;
0056<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 35</figref> is an explanatory view showing another time multiplexing of D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>, and D<sub>3 </sub>signals according to the third embodiment;
0057<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 36</figref> is an explanatory view showing a further time multiplexing of D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>, and D<sub>3 </sub>signals according to the third embodiment;
0058<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 37</figref> is a schematic view of the entire arrangement of a signal transmission system showing a fourth embodiment of the present invention;
0059<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 38</figref> is a vector diagram of a modified 16 QAM signal of the third embodiment;
0060<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 39</figref> is a vector diagram of the modified 16 QAM signal of the third embodiment;
0061<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 40</figref> is a vector diagram of a modified 64 QAM signal of the third embodiment;
0062<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 41</figref> is a diagram of assignment of data components on a time base according to the third embodiment;
0063<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 42</figref> is a diagram of assignment of data components on a time base in TDMA action according to the third embodiment;
0064<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 43</figref> is a block diagram of a carrier reproducing circuit of the third embodiment;
0065<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 44</figref> is a diagram showing the principle of carrier wave reproduction according to the third embodiment;
0066<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 45</figref> is a block diagram of a carrier reproducing circuit for reverse modulation of the third embodiment;
0067<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 46</figref> is a diagram showing an assignment of signal points of the 16 QAM signal of the third embodiment;
0068<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 47</figref> is a diagram showing an assignment of signal points of the 64 QAM signal of the third embodiment;
0069<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 48</figref> is a block diagram of a carrier reproducing circuit for 16× multiplication of the third embodiment;
0070<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 49</figref> is an explanatory view showing a time multiplexing of D<sub>V1</sub>, D<sub>H1</sub>, D<sub>V2</sub>, D<sub>H2</sub>, D<sub>V3</sub>, and D<sub>H3 </sub>signals according to the third embodiment;
0071<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 50</figref> is an explanatory view showing a TDMA time multiplexing of D<sub>V1</sub>, D<sub>H1</sub>, D<sub>V2</sub>, D<sub>H2</sub>, D<sub>V3</sub>, and D<sub>H3 </sub>signals according to the third embodiment;
0072<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 51</figref> is an explanatory view showing another TDMA time multiplexing of the D<sub>V1</sub>, D<sub>H1</sub>, D<sub>V2</sub>, D<sub>H2</sub>, D<sub>V3</sub>, and D<sub>H3 </sub>signals according to the third embodiment;
0073<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 52</figref> is a diagram showing a signal interference region in a known transmission method according to the fourth embodiment;
0074<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 53</figref> is a diagram showing signal interference regions in a multi-level signal transmission method according to the fourth embodiment;
0075<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 54</figref> is a diagram showing signal attenuating regions in the known transmission method according to the fourth embodiment;
0076<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 55</figref> is a diagram showing signal attenuating regions in the multi-level signal transmission method according to the fourth embodiment;
0077<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 56</figref> is a diagram showing a signal interference region between two digital TV stations according to the fourth embodiment;
0078<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 57</figref> is a diagram showing an assignment of signal points of modified 4 ASK signal of the fifth embodiment;
0079<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 58</figref> is a diagram showing another assignment of signal points of the modified 4 ASK signal of the fifth embodiment;
0080FIGS. <b>59</b>(a) and <b>59</b>(b) are diagrams showing assignment of signal points of the modified 4 ASK signal of the fifth embodiment and FIGS. <b>59</b>(c) and <b>59</b>(d) are diagrams respectively showing the slice levels of the modulated 4 ASK signal in subchannels <b>1</b> and <b>2</b>;
0081<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 60</figref> is a diagram showing another assignment of signal points of the modified 4 ASK signal of the fifth embodiment when the C/N rate is low;
0082<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 61</figref> shows a 4- and 8-level VSB transmitter according to the fifth embodiment of the invention;
0083FIG. <b>62</b>(a) is a wave spectrum diagram of the ASK signal, i.e., a multi-value VSB signal before filtering, in the fifth embodiment of the invention and FIG. <b>62</b>(b) is a wave spectrum diagram showing the characteristics of the filtered VSB signal;
0084<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 63</figref> is a block diagram of a 4-, 8-, and 16-level VSB receiver in the fifth embodiment of the invention;
0085<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 64</figref> is a block diagram of a video signal transmitter of the fifth embodiment;
0086<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 65</figref> is a block diagram of a TV receiver of the fifth embodiment; <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 66</figref> is a block diagram of another TV receiver of the fifth embodiment;
0087<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 67</figref> is a block diagram of a satellite-to-ground TV receiver of the fifth embodiment;
0088FIG. <b>68</b>(a) is an 8-level VSB constellation map in the fifth and sixth embodiments of the invention;
0089FIG. <b>68</b>(b) is an 8-level VSB constellation map in the fifth and sixth embodiments of the invention;
0090FIG. <b>68</b>(c) is an 8-level VSB signal-time waveform diagram in the fifth and sixth embodiments of the invention;
0091<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 69</figref> is a block diagram of a video encoder of the fifth embodiment;
0092<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 70</figref> is a block diagram of a video encoder of the fifth embodiment containing one divider circuit;
0093<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 71</figref> is a block diagram of a video decoder of the fifth embodiment;
0094<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 72</figref> is a block diagram of a video decoder of the fifth embodiment containing one mixer circuit;
0095<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 73</figref> is a diagram showing a time assignment of data components of a transmission signal according to the fifth embodiment;
0096FIG. <b>74</b>(a) is a block diagram of a video decoder of the fifth embodiment;
0097FIG. <b>74</b>(b) is a diagram showing another time assignment of data components of the transmission signal according to the fifth embodiment;
0098<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 75</figref> is a diagram showing a time assignment of data components of a transmission signal according to the fifth embodiment;
0099<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 76</figref> is a diagram showing a time assignment of data components of a transmission signal according to the fifth embodiment;
0100<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 77</figref> is a diagram showing a time assignment of data components of a transmission signal according to the fifth embodiment;
0101<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 78</figref> is a block diagram of a video decoder of the fifth embodiment;
0102<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 79</figref> is a diagram showing a time assignment of data components of a three-level transmission signal according to the fifth embodiment;
0103<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 80</figref> is a block diagram of another video decoder of the fifth embodiment;
0104<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 81</figref> is a diagram showing a time assignment of data components of a transmission signal according to the fifth embodiment;
0105<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 82</figref> is a block diagram of a video decoder for D<sub>1 </sub>signal of the fifth embodiment;
0106<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 83</figref> is a graphic diagram showing the relationship between frequency and time of a frequency modulated signal according to the fifth embodiment;
0107<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 84</figref> is a block diagram of a magnetic record/playback apparatus of the fifth embodiment;
0108<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 85</figref> is a graphic diagram showing the relationship between C/N and level according to the second embodiment;
0109<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 86</figref> is a graphic diagram showing the relationship between C/N and transmission distance according to the second embodiment;
0110<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 87</figref> is a block diagram of a transmissiontransmitter of the second embodiment;
0111<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 88</figref> is a block diagram of a receiver of the second embodiment;
0112<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 89</figref> is a graphic diagram showing the relationship between C/N and error rate according to the second embodiment;
0113<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 90</figref> is a diagram showing signal attenuating regions in the three-level transmission of the fifth embodiment;
0114<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 91</figref> is a diagram showing signal attenuating regions in the four-level transmission of athe sixth embodiment;
0115<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 92</figref> is a diagram showing the four-level transmission of the sixth embodiment;
0116<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 93</figref> is a block diagram of a divider of the sixth embodiment;
0117<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 94</figref> is block diagram of a mixer of the sixth embodiment;
0118<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 95</figref> is a diagram showing another four-level transmission of the sixth embodiment;
0119<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 96</figref> is a view of signal propagation of a known digital TV broadcast system;
0120<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 97</figref> is a view of signal propagation of a digital TV broadcast system according to the sixth embodiment;
0121<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 98</figref> is a diagram showing a four-level transmission of the sixth embodiment;
0122<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 99</figref> is a vector diagram of a 16 SRQAM signal of the third embodiment;
0123<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 100</figref> is a vector diagram of a 32 SRQAM signal of the third embodiment;
0124<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 101</figref> is a graphic diagram showing the relationship between C/N and error rakerate according to the third embodiment; <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 102</figref> is a graphic diagram showing the relationship between C/N and error rate according to the third embodiment;
0125<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 103</figref> is a graphic diagram showing the relationship between shift distance n and C/N needed for transmission according to the third embodiment;
0126<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 104</figref> is a graphic diagram showing the relationship between shift distance n and C/N needed for transmission according to the third embodiment;
0127<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 105</figref> is a graphic diagram showing the relationship between signal level and distance from a transmitter antenna in terrestrial broadcast service according to the third embodiment;
0128<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 106</figref> is a diagram showing a service area of the 32 SRQAM signal of the third embodiment;
0129<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 107</figref> is a diagram showing a service area of the 32 SRQAM signal of the third embodiment;
0130FIG. <b>108</b>(a) is a diagram showing a frequency distribution profile of a conventional TV signal;
0131FIG. <b>108</b>(b) is a diagram showing a frequency distribution profile of a conventional two-layer TV signal;
0132FIG. <b>108</b>(c) is a diagram showing threshold values of the third embodiment;
0133FIG. <b>108</b>(d) is a diagram showing a frequency distribution profile of two-layer OFDM carriers of the ninth embodiment, and FIG. <b>108</b>(e) is a diagram showing threshold values for three-layer OFDM of the ninth embodiment;
0134<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 109</figref> is a diagram showing a time assignment of the TV signal of the third embodiment;
0135<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 110</figref> is a diagram showing a principle of C-CDM of the third embodiment;
0136<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 111</figref> is a view showing an assignment of codes according to the third embodiment;
0137<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 112</figref> is a view showing an assignment of an extended 36 QAM according to the third embodiment;
0138<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 113</figref> is a view showing a frequency assignment of a modulation signal according to the fifth embodiment;
0139<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 114</figref> is a block diagram showing a magnetic recording/playback apparatus according to the fifth embodiment;
0140<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 115</figref> is a block diagram showing a transmitter/receiver of a portable telephone according to the eighth embodiment;
0141<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 116</figref> is a block diagram showing base stations according to the eighth embodiment;
0142<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 117</figref> is a view illustrating communication capacities and traffic distribution of a conventional system;
0143<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 118</figref> is a view illustrating communication capacities and traffic distribution according to the eighth embodiment;
0144FIG. <b>119</b>(a) is a diagram showing a time slot assignment of a conventional system;
0145FIG. <b>119</b>(b) is a diagram showing a time slot assignment according to the eighth embodiment;
0146FIG. <b>120</b>(a) is a diagram showing a time slot assignment of a conventional TDMA system;
0147FIG. <b>120</b>(b) is a diagram showing a time slot assignment according to a TDMA system of the eighth embodiment;
0148<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 121</figref> is a block diagram showing a one-level transmitter/receiver according to the eighth embodiment;
0149<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 122</figref> is a block diagram showing a two-level transmitter/receiver according to the eighth embodiment;
0150<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 123</figref> is a block diagram showing an OFDM type transmitter/receiver according to the ninth embodiment;
0151<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 124</figref> is a view illustrating a principle of the OFDM system according to the ninth embodiment;
0152FIG. <b>125</b>(a) is a view showing a frequency assignment of a modulation signal of a conventional system;
0153FIG. <b>125</b>(b) is a view showing a frequency assignment of a modulation signal according to the ninth embodiment;
0154FIG. <b>126</b>(a) is a view showing a frequency assignment of an OFDM signal of the ninth embodiment, wherein no weighting is applied;
0155FIG. <b>126</b>(b) is a view showing a frequency assignment of an OFDM signal of the ninth embodiment, wherein two channels of two-layer OFDM are weighted by transmission electric power;
0156FIG. <b>126</b>(c) is a view showing a frequency assignment of an OFDM signal of the ninth embodiment, wherein carrier intervals are doubled by weighting;
0157FIG. <b>126</b>(d) is a view showing a frequency assignment of an OFDM signal of the ninth embodiment, wherein carrier intervals are not weighted;
0158<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 127</figref> is a block diagram showing a transmitter/receiver according to the ninth embodiment;
0159FIG. <b>128</b>(a) is a block diagram of a trellis encoder (ratio ½) in embodiments <b>2</b>, <b>4</b>, and <b>5</b>,
0160FIG. <b>128</b>(b) is a block diagram of a trellis encoder (ratio ⅔) in embodiments <b>2</b>, <b>4</b>, and <b>5</b>,
0161FIG. <b>128</b>(c) is a block diagram of a trellis encoder (ratio ¾) in embodiments <b>2</b>, <b>4</b>, and <b>5</b>,
0162FIG. <b>128</b>(d) is a block diagram of a trellis decoder (ratio ½) in embodiments <b>2</b>, <b>4</b>, and <b>5</b>,
0163FIG. <b>128</b>(e) is a block diagram of a trellis decoder (ratio ⅔) in embodiments <b>2</b>, <b>4</b>, and <b>5</b>,
0164FIG. <b>128</b>(f) is a block diagram of a trellis decoder (ratio ¾) in embodiments <b>2</b>, <b>4</b>, and <b>5</b>;
0165<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 129</figref> is a view showing a time assignment of effective symbol periods and guard intervals according to the ninth embodiment;
0166<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 130</figref> is a graphic diagram showing a relationship between C/N rate and error rate according to the ninth embodiment;
0167<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 131</figref> is a block diagram showing a magnetic recording/playback apparatus according to the fifth embodiment;
0168<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 132</figref> is a view showing a recording format of track on the magnetic tape and a travellingtraveling of a head;
0169<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 133</figref> is a block diagram showing a transmitter/receiver according to the third embodiment;
0170<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 134</figref> is a diagram showing a frequency assignment of a conventional broadcasting;
0171<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 135</figref> is a diagram showing a relationship between service area and picture quality in a three-level signal transmission system according to the third embodiment;
0172<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 136</figref> is a diagram showing a frequency assignment in case the multi-level signal transmission system according to the third embodiment is combined with FDM;
0173<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 137</figref> is a block diagram showing a transmitter/receiver according to the third embodiment, in which Trellis encoding is adopted;
0174<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 138</figref> is a block diagram showing a transmitter/receiver according to the ninth embodiment, in which a part of low frequency band signal is transmitted by OFDM;
0175<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 139</figref> is a diagram showing an assignment of signal points of the 8-PS-APSK signal of the first embodiment;
0176<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 140</figref> is a diagram showing an assignment of signal points of the 16-PS-APSK signal of the first embodiment;
0177<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 141</figref> is a diagram showing an assignment of signal points of the 8-PS-PSK signal of the first embodiment;
0178<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 142</figref> is a diagram showing an assignment of signal points of the 16-PS-PSK (PS type) signal of the first embodiment;
0179<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 143</figref> is a graphic diagram showing the relationship between antenna radius of satellite and transmission capacity according to the first embodiment;
0180<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 144</figref> is a block diagram showing a weighted OFDM transmitter/receiver according to the ninth embodiment;
0181FIG. <b>145</b>(a) is a diagram showing the waveform of the guard time and the symbol time in the multi-level OFDM according to the ninth embodiment, wherein multipath is short;
0182FIG. <b>145</b>(b) is a diagram showing the waveform of the guard time and the symbol time in the multi-level OFDM according to the ninth embodiment, wherein multipath is long;
0183<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 146</figref> is a diagram showing a principle of the multi-level OFDM according to the ninth embodiment;
0184<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 147</figref> is a diagram showing subchannel assignment of a two-layer signal transmission system, weighted electric power according to the ninth embodiment;
0185<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 148</figref> is a diagram showing relationship among the D/V ratio, the multipath delay time, and the guard time according to the ninth embodiment;
0186FIG. <b>149</b>(a) is a diagram showing time slots of respective layers according to the ninth embodiment;
0187FIG. <b>149</b>(b) is a diagram showing time distribution of guard times of respective layers according to the ninth embodiment;
0188FIG. <b>149</b>(c) is a diagram showing time distribution of guard times of respective layers according to the ninth embodiment;
0189<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 150</figref> is a diagram showing the relationship between multipath delay time and transfer rate according to the ninth embodiment, wherein a three-layer signal transmission effective to multipath is realized; and
0190<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 151</figref> is a diagram showing the relationship between multipath delay time and C/N ratio according to the ninth embodiment, wherein two-dimensional, matrix type, multi-layer broadcast service can be realized by combining the GTW-OFDM and the C-CDM (or the CSW-OFDM).
0191<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 152</figref> is a timing chart of a 3-level hierarchical television signal at each time slot when GTW-OFDM of the ninth embodiment is combined with C-CDM (or CSW-OFDM);
0192<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 153</figref> shows the relationship between the multipath signal delay time, C/N ratio, and transmission rate when GTW-OFDM of the ninth embodiment is combined with C-CDM (or CSW-OFDM), and is used to describe the hierarchical broadcasting method using three-dimensional matrix structure;
0193<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 154A-C</figref> together form a frequency distribution graph of power weight OFDM in the ninth embodiment;
0194<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 155</figref> shows the position on the time axis of a 3-level hierarchical television signal at each time slot when guard time-OFDM of the ninth embodiment is combined with C-CDM;
0195<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 156</figref> is a block diagram of the transmitter and the receiver in the fourth and fifth embodiments of the invention;
0196<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 157</figref> is a block diagram of the transmitter and the receiver in the fourth and fifth embodiments of the invention;
0197<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 158</figref> is a block diagram of the transmitter and the receiver in the fourth and fifth embodiments of the invention;
0198FIG. <b>159</b>(a) is a signal point positioning diagram in 16-level VSB in the fifth embodiment of the invention;
0199FIG. <b>159</b>(b) is a signal point positioning (8-level VSB) diagram in 16-level VSB in the fifth embodiment of the invention;
0200FIG. <b>159</b>(c) is a signal point positioning (4-level VSB) diagram in 16-level VSB in the fifth embodiment of the invention;
0201FIG. <b>159</b>(d) is a signal point positioning (16-level VSB) diagram in 16-level VSB in the fifth embodiment of the invention;
0202FIG. <b>160</b>(a) is a block diagram of an ECC encoder in the fifth and sixth embodiments of the invention;
0203FIG. <b>160</b>(b) is a block diagram of an ECC decoder in the fifth and sixth embodiments of the invention;
0204<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 161</figref> is an overall block diagram of a VSB receiver in the fifth embodiment of the invention;
0205<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 162</figref> is a block diagram of a the receiver in the fifth embodiment of the invention;
0206<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 163</figref> is a graph of the error rate and C/N ratio curve in 4-level VSB and TC-8-level VSB in the fourth embodiment of the invention;
0207<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 164</figref> is an error rate curve of subchannel <b>1</b> and subchannel <b>2</b> in 4-level VSB and TC-8-level VSB in the fourth embodiment of the invention;
0208FIG. <b>165</b>(a) is a block diagram of the Reed-Solomon encoder in the second, fourth, and fifth embodiments of the invention;
0209FIG. <b>165</b>(b) is a block diagram of the Reed-Solomon decoder in the second, fourth, and fifth embodiments of the invention;
0210<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 166</figref> is a flowchart of Reed-Solomon error correction and operation in the second, fourth and fifth embodiments of the invention;
0211<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 167</figref> is a block diagram of the deinterleaver in the second, third, fourth, fifth and sixth embodiments of the invention;
0212FIG. <b>168</b>(a) is an interleave/deinterleave table for the second, third, fourth, and fifth embodiments of the invention;
0213FIG. <b>168</b>(b) shows the interleave distance in the second, third, fourth, and fifth embodiments of the invention;
0214<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 169</figref> is a comparison of redundancy in 4-level VSB, 8-level VSB, and 16-level VSB in the fifth embodiment of the invention;
0215<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 170</figref> is a block diagram of a television receiver for receiving the high priority signal of the second, third, fourth, and fifth embodiments of the invention;
0216<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 171</figref> is a block diagram of the receiver and transmitter in the second, third, fourth, and fifth embodiments of the invention;
0217<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 172</figref> is a block diagram of the receiver and transmitter in the second, third, fourth, and fifth embodiments of the invention; and
0218<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 173</figref> is a block diagram of an ASK magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus according to the sixth embodiment of the invention;
0219<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 174</figref> is a block diagram showing a circuitry arrangement of QAM/VSB compatible modulator for multi-level transmission according to Embodiment <b>5</b>.
0220<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 175</figref> is a block diagram showing another circuitry arrangement of the QAM/VSB modulator for multi-level transmission according to Embodiment <b>5</b>.
0221<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 176</figref> illustrates a third modification of the QAM/VSB modulator of Embodiment <b>5</b>.
0222<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 177</figref> is a block diagram showing a Trellis decoder in the demodulator of Embodiment <b>5</b>.
0223<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 178</figref> is a block diagram of a receiver of Embodiment <b>5</b> for interception of VSB multi-level transmitted signals emitted in the air.
0224<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 179</figref>is illustrates another arrangement of the QAM/VSB compatible receiver of Embodiment <b>5</b>.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
EMBODIMENT 1
0225One embodiment of the present invention will be described referring to the relevant drawings.
0226In the preferred embodiment of the invention both the transmission apparatus, which comprises a transmitter for transmitting a digital HDTV signal or other digital signal and a receiver for receiving the transmitted signal, and the recording and reproducing apparatus, which records the digital HDTV signal or other digital signal on a magnetic tape or other recording medium and reproduces the recorded signal from said medium, are described.
0227It should be noted, however, that the configuration, operation, and principle of the digital modulator and demodulator, error correction encoder and decoder, and the encoder and decoder for image coding the HDTV signal are common to the transmission apparatus and the recording and reproducing apparatus, and apply essentially the same technologies. Therefore, to more concisely describe each embodiment, the block diagrams for either the transmission apparatus or the recording and reproducing apparatus are referenced in the description of each embodiment. In addition, the configuration of each embodiment of the invention can be achieved by means of any multi-value digital modulation method, e.g., QAM, ASK and PSK, positioning signal points in a constellation, and for brevity the embodiments of the present invention are described using only one modulation method. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref> shows the entire arrangement of a signal transmission system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. A transmitter <b>1</b> comprises an input unit <b>2</b>, divider circuit <b>3</b>, a modulator <b>4</b>, and a transmitter unit <b>5</b>. In operation, each input multiplex signal is divided by the divider circuit <b>3</b> into three groups, a first data stream D<b>1</b>, a second data stream and, a third data stream D<b>3</b>, which are then modulated by the modulator <b>4</b> before being transmitted from the transmitter unit <b>5</b>. The modulated signal is sent up from an antenna <b>6</b> through an uplink <b>7</b> to a satellite <b>10</b> where it is intercepted by an uplink antenna <b>11</b> and amplified by a transponder <b>12</b> before being transmitted from a downlink antenna <b>13</b> towards the ground.
0228The transmission signal is then sent down through three downlinks <b>21</b>, <b>32</b><b>31</b>, and <b>41</b> to a first <b>23</b>, a second <b>33</b>, and a third receiver <b>43</b> respectively. In the first receiver <b>23</b>, the signal intercepted by an antenna <b>22</b> is fed through an input unit <b>24</b> to a demodulator <b>25</b> where its first data stream only is demodulated, while the second and third data streams are not recovered, before being transmitted further from an output unit <b>26</b>.
0229Similarly, the second receiver <b>33</b> allows the first and second data streams of the signal intercepted by an antenna <b>32</b> and fed from an input unit <b>34</b> to be demodulated by a demodulator <b>35</b> and then, combined by a mixer <b>37</b> into a single data stream which is then transmitted further from an output unit <b>36</b>.
0230The third receiver <b>43</b> allows all of the first, second, and third data streams of the signal intercepted by an antenna <b>42</b> and fed from an input unit <b>44</b> to be demodulated by a demodulator <b>45</b> and then, combined by a mixer <b>47</b> into a single data stream which is then transmitted further from an output unit <b>46</b>.
0231As understood, the three discrete receivers <b>23</b>, <b>33</b>, and <b>43</b> have their respective demodulators of different characteristics such that their outputs demodulated from the same frequency band signal of the transmitter <b>1</b> contain data of different sizes. More particularly, three different but compatible data can simultaneously be carried on a given frequency band signal to their respective receivers. For example, each of three, existing NTSC, HDTV, and super HDTV, digital signals is divided into low, high, and super high frequency band components which represent the first, the second, and the third data stream respectively. Accordingly, the three different TV signals can be transmitted on a one-channel frequency band carrier for simultaneous reproduction of medium, high, and super high resolution TV images respectively.
0232The NTSC TV signal is intercepted by a receiver accompanied by a small antenna for demodulation of small-sized data; the HDTV signal is intercepted by a receiver accompanied by a medium antenna for demodulation of medium-sized data, and the super HDTV signal is intercepted by a receiver accompanied by a large antenna for demodulation of large-sized data. Also, as illustrated in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref>, a digital NTSC TV signal containing only the first data stream for digital NTSC TV broadcasting service is fed to a digital transmitter <b>51</b> where it is received by an input unit <b>52</b> and modulated by a demodulatormodulator <b>54</b> before being transmitted further from a transmitter unit <b>55</b>. The demodulatedmodulated signal is then sent up from an antenna <b>56</b> through an uplink <b>57</b> to the satellite <b>10</b> which in turn transmits the same through a downlink <b>58</b> to the first receiver <b>23</b> on the ground.
0233The first receiver <b>23</b> demodulates with its demodulator <b>25</b> the modulated digital signal supplied from the digital transmitter <b>51</b> into the original first data stream signal. Similarly, the same modulated digital signal can be intercepted and demodulated by the second receiver <b>33</b> or third receiver <b>43</b> into the first data stream or NTSC TV signal. In summary, the three discrete receivers <b>23</b>, <b>33</b>, and <b>43</b> all can intercept and process a digital signal of the existing TV system for reproduction.
0234The arrangement of the signal transmission system will be described in more detail.
0235<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2</figref> is a block diagram of the transmitter <b>1</b>, in which an input signal is fed across the input unit <b>2</b> and divided by the divider circuit <b>3</b> into three digital signals containing a first, a second, and a third data stream respectively.
0236Assuming that the input signal is a video signal, its low frequency band component is assigned to the first data stream, its high frequency band component to the second data stream, its super-high frequency band component to the third data stream. The three different frequency band signals are fed to a modulator input <b>61</b> of the modulator <b>4</b>. Here, a signal point shifting circuit <b>67</b> shifts the positions of the signal points according to an externally given signal. The modulator <b>4</b> is arranged for amplitude modulation on two 90°-out-of phase carriers respectively which are then combined into a multiple QAM signal. More specifically, the signal from the modulator input <b>61</b> is fed to both a first AM modulator <b>64</b><b>62</b>and a second AM modulator <b>63</b>. Also, a carrier wave of cos(2πfct) produced by a carrier generator <b>64</b> is directly fed to the first AM modulator <b>64</b><b>62</b>and also, to a π/2 phase shifter <b>66</b> where it is 90° shifted in phase to a sin(2πfct) form prior to being transmitted to the second AM modulator <b>63</b>. The two amplitude modulated signals from the first and second AM modulators <b>64</b><b>62</b>, <b>63</b> are combined by a summer <b>65</b> into a transmission signal which is then transferred to the transmitter unit <b>5</b> for output. The procedure is well known and will not be further explained.
0237The QAM signal will now be described in a common 4×4 or 16 state constellation referring to the first quadrant of a space diagram in FIG. <b>3</b>. The output signal of the modulator <b>4</b> is expressed by a sum vector of two, Acos2πfct and BcosBsin 2πfct, vectors <b>81</b> and <b>82</b> which respectively represent the two 90°-out-of-phase carriers. When the distal point of a sum vector from the zero point represents a signal point, the 16 QAM signal has 16 signal points determined by a combination of four horizontal amplitude values a<sub>1</sub>, a<sub>2</sub>, a<sub>3</sub>, and a<sub>4 </sub>and four vertical amplitude values b<sub>1</sub>, b<sub>2</sub>, b<sub>3</sub>, and b<sub>4</sub>. The first quadrant in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref> contains four signal points <b>83</b> at c<sub>11</sub>, <b>84</b> at c<sub>12</sub>, <b>85</b> at c<sub>22</sub>, and <b>86</b> at c<sub>21</sub>.
0238c<sub>11 </sub>is a sum vector of a vector <b>0</b>-a<sub>1 </sub>and a vector <b>0</b>-b<sub>1 </sub>and thus, expressed as c<sub>11</sub>=a<sub>1</sub>cos2πfct−b<sub>1</sub>sin2πfct=Acos (2πfct+dπ/2).
0239It is now assumed that the distance between <b>0</b> and a<sub>1 </sub>in the orthogonal coordinates of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 3</figref> is A<sub>1</sub>, between a<sub>1 </sub>and a<sub>2 </sub>is A<sub>2</sub>, between <b>0</b> and b<sub>1 </sub>is B<sub>1</sub>, and between b<sub>1 </sub>and b<sub>2 </sub>is B<sub>2</sub>.
0240As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 4</figref>, the 16 signal points are allocated in a vector coordinate, in which each point represents a four-bit pattern thus to allow the transmission of four bit data per period or time slot.
0241<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref> illustrates a common assignment of two-bit patterns to the 16 signal points.
0242When the distance between two adjacent signal points is great, it will be identified by the receiver with much ease. Hence, it is desirable to space the signal points at greater intervals. If two particular signal points are allocated near to each other, they are rarely distinguished and the error rate will be increased. Therefore, it is most preferable to have the signal points spaced at equal intervals as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 5</figref>, in which the 16 QAM signal is defined by A<sub>1</sub>=A<sub>2</sub>/2.
0243The transmitter <b>1</b> of the embodiment is arranged to divide an input digital signal into a first, a second, and a third data or bit stream. The 16 signal points or groups of signal points are divided into four groups. Then, 4 two-bit patterns of the first data stream are assigned to the four signal point groups respectively, as shown in FIG. <b>6</b>. More particularly, when the two-bit pattern of the first data stream is <b>11</b>, one of four signal points of the first signal point group <b>91</b> in the first quadrant is selected depending on the content of the second data stream for transmission. Similarly, when <b>01</b>, one signal point of the second signal point group <b>92</b> in the second quadrant is selected and transmitted. When <b>00</b>, one signal point of the third signal point group <b>93</b> in the third quadrant is transmitted and when <b>10</b>, one signal point of the fourth signal point group <b>94</b> in the fourth quadrant is transmitted. Also, 4 two-bit patterns in the second data stream of the 16 QAM signal, or e.g. 16 four-bit patterns in the second data stream of a 64-state QAM signal, are assigned to four signal points or sub signal point groups of each of the four signal point groups <b>91</b>, <b>92</b>, <b>93</b>, and <b>94</b> respectively, as shown in FIG. <b>7</b>. It should be understood that the assignment is symmetrical between any two quadrants. The assignment of the signal points to the four groups <b>91</b>, <b>92</b>, <b>93</b>, and <b>94</b> is determined by priority to the two-bit data of the first data stream. As the result, two-bit data of the first data stream and two-bit data of the second data stream can be transmitted independently. Also, the first data stream will be demodulated by using a common 4 PSK receiver having a given antenna sensitivity. If the antenna sensitivity is higher, a modified type of the 16 QAM receiver of the present invention will intercept and demodulate both the first and second data streamstreams with equal success.
0244<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 8</figref> shows an example of the assignment of the first and second data streams in two-bit patterns.
0245When the low frequency band component of an HDTV video signal is assigned to the first data stream and the high frequency component to the second data stream, the 4 PSK receiver can produce an NTSC-level picture from the first data stream and the 16- or 64-state QAM receiver can produce an HDTV picture from a composite reproduction signal of the first and second data streams.
0246Since the signal points are allocated at equal intervals, there is developed in the 4 PSK receiver a threshold distance between the coordinate axes and the shaded area of the first quadrant, as shown in FIG. <b>9</b>. If the threshold distance is A<sub>TO</sub>, a PSK signal having an amplitude of A<sub>TO </sub>will successfully be intercepted. However, the amplitude has to be increased to a three times greater value or <b>3</b>A<sub>TO </sub>for transmission of a 16 QAM signal while the threshold distance A<sub>TO </sub>is maintained. More particularly, the energy needed for transmitting the 16 QAM signal is nine times greater than that for sending the 4 PSK signal. Also, when the 4 PSK signal is transmitted in a 16 QAM mode, energy waste will be high and reproduction of a carrier signal will be troublesome. Above all, the energy available for satellite transmitting is not abundant but strictly limited to minimum use. Hence, no large-energy-consuming signal transmitting system will be put into practice until more energy for satellite transmission is available. It is expected that a great number of the 4 PSK receivers will be introduced into the market as digital TV broadcasting is placed in service. After introduction to the market, the 4 PSK receivers will hardly be shifted to higher sensitivity models because a signal intercepting characteristic gap between the two, old and new, models is high. Therefore, the transmission of the 4 PSK signals must not be abandoned. In this respect, a new system is desperately needed for transmitting the signal point data of a quasi 4 PSK signal in the 16 QAM mode using less energy. Otherwise, the limited energy at a satellite station will degrade the entire transmission system.
0247The present invention resides in a multiple signal level arrangement in which the four signal point groups <b>91</b>, <b>92</b>, <b>93</b>, and <b>94</b> are allocated at a greater distance from each other, as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 10</figref>, for minimizing the energy consumption required for 16 QAM modulation of quasi 4 PSK signals.
0248For clearing the relationship between the signal receiving sensitivity and the transmitting energy, the arrangement of the digital transmitter <b>51</b> and the first receiver <b>23</b> will be described in more detail referring to FIG. <b>1</b>.
0249Both the digital transmitter <b>51</b> and the first receiver <b>2</b><b>3</b><b>23</b>are formed of known types for data transmission or video signal transmission e.g. in TV broadcasting service. As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 17</figref>, the digital transmitter <b>51</b> is a 4 PSK transmitter equivalent to the multiple-bit QAM transmitter <b>1</b>, shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2</figref>, without AM modulation capability. In operation, an input signal is fed through an input unit <b>52</b> to a modulator <b>54</b> where it is divided by a modulator input <b>121</b> into two components. The two components are then transferred to a first two-phase modulator circuit <b>122</b> for phase modulation of a base carrier and a second two-phase modulator circuit <b>123</b> for phase modulation of a carrier which is 90° out of phase with the base carrier respectively. The two outputs of the first and second two-phase modulator circuits <b>122</b> and <b>123</b> are then combined by a summer <b>65</b> into a composite modulated signal which is further transmitted from a transmitter unit <b>55</b>.
0250The resultant modulated signal is shown in the space diagram of FIG. <b>18</b>.
0251It is known that the four signal points are allcatedallocated at equal distances for achieving optimum energy utilization. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 18</figref> illustrates an example where the four signal points <b>125</b>, <b>126</b>, <b>127</b>, and <b>128</b> represent 4 two-bit patterns, <b>11</b>, <b>01</b>, <b>00</b>, and <b>10</b> respectively. It is also desirable for successful data transfer from the digital transmitter <b>51</b> to the first receiver <b>23</b> that the 4 PSK signal from the digital transmitter <b>51</b> has an amplitude of not less than a given level. More specifically, when the minimum amplitude of the 4 PSK signal needed for transmission from the digital transmitter <b>51</b> to the first receiver <b>23</b> of 4 PSK mode, or the distance between <b>0</b> and a<sub>1 </sub>in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 18</figref> is A<sub>TO</sub>, the first receiver <b>23</b> must successfully intercept any 4 PSK signal having an amplitude of more than A<sub>TO</sub>.
0252The first receiver <b>23</b> is arranged to receive at its small-diameter antenna <b>22</b> a desired or 4 PSK signal which is transmitted from the transmitter <b>1</b> or digital transmitter <b>51</b> respectively through the transponder <b>12</b> of the satellite <b>10</b> and demodulate it with the demodulator <b>24</b><b>25</b>. In more detail, the first receiver <b>23</b> is substantially designed for interception of a digital TV or data communications signal of 4 PSK or 2 PSK mode.
0253<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 19</figref> is a block diagram of the first receiver <b>23</b> in which an input signal received by the antenna <b>22</b> from the satellite <b>12</b><b>10</b>is fed through the input unit <b>24</b> to a carrier reproducing circuit <b>131</b> where a carrier wave is demodulated and to a π/2 phase shifter <b>132</b> where a 90° phase carrier wave is demodulated. Also, two 90°-out-of-phase components of the input signal are respectively detected by a first phase detector circuit <b>133</b> and a second phase detector circuit <b>134</b> and are respectively transferred to first <b>136</b> and second discrimination/demodulation circuits <b>136</b> and <b>137</b>. Two demodulated components from their respective discrimination/demodulation circuits <b>136</b> and <b>137</b>, which have separately been discriminated at units of time slot by means of timing signals from a timing wave extracting circuit <b>135</b>, are fed to a first data stream reproducing unit <b>232</b> where they are combined into a first data stream signal which is then delivered as an output from the output unit <b>26</b>.
0254The input signal to the first receiver <b>23</b> will now be explained in more detail referring to the vector diagram of FIG. <b>20</b>. The 4 PSK signal received by the first receiver <b>23</b> from the digital transmitter <b>51</b> is expressed in an ideal form without transmission distortion and noise, using four signal points <b>151</b>, <b>152</b>, <b>153</b>, and <b>154</b>, as shown in FIG. <b>20</b>.
0255In practice, the real four signal points appear in particular extended areas about the ideal signal positions <b>151</b>, <b>152</b>, <b>153</b>, and <b>154</b> respectively due to noise, amplitude distortion, and phase error developed during transmission. If one signal point is unfavorably displaced from its original position, it will hardly be distinguished from its neighboring signal point and the error rate will thus be increased. As the error rate increases to a critical level, the reproduction of data becomes less accurate. For enabling the data reproduction at a maximum acceptable level of the error rate, the distance between any two signal points should be far enough to be distinguished from each other. If the distance is <b>1</b>A<sub>R0</sub>, the signal point <b>151</b> of a 4 PSK signal close to a critical error level has to stay in a first discrimination area <b>155</b> denoted by the hatching of FIG. <b>20</b> and determined by |<b>0</b>-a<sub>R1</sub>|>A<sub>R0 </sub>and |<b>0</b>-b<sub>R1</sub>|>A<sub>R0</sub>. This allows the signal transmission system to reproduce carrier waves and thus, demodulate a wanted signal. When the minimum radius of the antenna <b>22</b> is set to r<sub>0</sub>, the transmission signal of more than a given level can be intercepted by any receiver of the system. The amplitude of a 4 PSK signal of the digital transmitter <b>51</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 18</figref> is minimum at A<sub>T0 </sub>and thus, the minimum amplitude A<sub>R0 </sub>of a 4 PSK signal to be received by the first receiver <b>23</b> is determined to be equal to A<sub>T0</sub>. As a result, the first receiver <b>23</b> can intercept and demodulate the 4 PSK signal from the digital transmitter <b>51</b> at the maximum acceptable level of the error rate when the radius of the antenna <b>22</b> is more than r<sub>0</sub>. If the transmission signal is of a modified 16- or 64-state QAM mode, the first receiver <b>23</b> may find it difficult to reproduce its carrier wave. For compensation, the signal points are increased to eight which are allocated at angles of (π/4+nπ/2) as shown in FIG. <b>25</b>(a) and its carrier wave will be reproduced by a 16× multiplication technique. Also, if the signal points are assigned to 16 locations at angles of nπ/8 as shown in FIG. <b>25</b>(b), the carrier of a quasi 4 PSK mode 16 QAM modulated signal can be reproduced with the carrier reproducing circuit <b>131</b> which is modified for performing 16× frequency multiplication. At the time, the signal points in the transmitter <b>1</b> should be arranged to satisfy A<sub>1</sub>/(A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>2</sub>)=tan(π/8).
0256Here, a case of receiving a QPSK signal will be considered. Similarly to the manner performed by the signal point setting circuit <b>67</b> in the transmitter shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 2</figref>, it is also possible to modulate the positions of the signal points of the QPSK signal shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 18</figref> (amplitude-modulation, pulse-modulation, or the like). In this case, the signal point demodulating unit <b>138</b> in the first receiver <b>23</b> demodulates the position modulated or position changed signal. The demodulated signal is outputted together with the first data stream.
0257The 16 PSK signal of the transmitter <b>1</b> will now be explained referring to the vector diagram of FIG. <b>9</b>. When the horizontal vector distance A<sub>1 </sub>of the signal point <b>83</b> is greater than A<sub>T0 </sub>of the minimum amplitude of the 4 PSK signal of the digital transmitter <b>51</b>, the four signal points <b>83</b>, <b>84</b>, <b>85</b>, and <b>86</b> in the first quadrant of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 9</figref> stay in the shaded or first 4 PSK signal receivable area <b>87</b>. When received by the first receiver <b>23</b>, the four points of the signal appear in the first discriminating area of the vector field shown in FIG. <b>20</b>. Hence, any of the signal points <b>83</b>, <b>84</b>, <b>85</b>, and <b>86</b> of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 9</figref> can be translated into the signal level <b>151</b> of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 20</figref> by the first receiver <b>23</b> so that the two-bit pattern of <b>11</b> is assigned to a corresponding time slot. The two-bit pattern of <b>11</b> is identical to <b>11</b> of the first signal point group <b>91</b> or first data stream of a signal from the transmitter <b>1</b>. Equally, the first data stream will be reproduced at the second, third, or fourth quadrant. As the result, the first receiver <b>23</b> reproduces two-bit data of the first data stream out of the plurality of data streams in a 16-, 32-, or 64-state QAM signal transmitted from the transmitter <b>1</b>. The second and third data streams are contained in four segments of the signal point group <b>91</b> and thus, will not affect the demodulation of the first data stream. They may however affect the reproduction of a carrier wave and an adjustment, described later, will be needed.
0258If the transponder of a satellite supplies an abundance of energy, the forgoing technique of 16 to 64-state QAM mode transmission will be feasible. However, the transponder of the satellite in any existing satellite transmission system is strictly limited in the power supply due to its compact size and the capability of solar batteries. If the transponder or satellite is increased in size and thus weight, its launching cost will soar. This disadvantage will rarely be eliminated by traditional techniques unless the cost of launching a satellite rocket is reduced byto a considerable level. In the existing system, a common communications satellite provides as low as 20 W of power and a common broadcast satellite offers 100 W to 200 W at best. For transmission of such a 4 PSK signal in the symmetrical 16-state QAM mode as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 9</figref>, the minimum signal point distance is neededneeded is <b>3</b>A<sub>TO </sub>as the 16 QAM amplitude is expressed by <b>2</b>A<sub>1</sub>=A<sub>2</sub>. Thus, the energy needed for the purpose is nine times greater than that for transmission of a common 4 PSK signal, in order to maintain compatibility. Also, any conventional satellite transponder can hardly provide a power for enabling such a small antenna of the 4 PSK first receiver to intercept a transmitted signal therefrom. For example, in the existing 40 W system, 360 W is needed for appropriate signal transmission and will be unrealistic with respect to cost.
0259It would be understood that the symmetrical signal state QAM technique is most effective when the receivers equipped with the same sized antennas are employed corresponding to a given transmitting power. Another novel technique will however be preferred for use with receivers equipped with different sized antennas.
0260In more detail, while the 4 PSK signal can be intercepted by a common low cost receiver system having a small antenna, the 16 QAM signal is intended to be received by a high cost, high quality, multiple-bit modulating receiver system with a medium or large sized antenna which is designed for providing highly valuable services, e.g. HDTV entertainment, to a particular person who invests more money. This allows both 4 PSK and 16 QAM signals, if desired, with a 64 DMAQAM, to be transmitted simultaneously with the help of a small increase in the transmitting power.
0261For example, the transmitting power can be maintained low when the signal points are allocated at A<sub>1</sub>=A<sub>2 </sub>as shown in FIG. <b>10</b>. The amplitude A(<b>4</b>) for transmission of 4 PSK data is expressed by a vector 96 equivalent to the square root of (A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>2</sub>)<sup>2</sup>+(B<sub>1</sub>+B<sub>2</sub>)<sup>2</sup>. Then, <br />|A(<b>4</b>)|<sub>2</sub>=A<sub>1</sub><sup>2</sup>+B<sub>1</sub><sup>2</sup>=A<sup>2</sup><sub>TO</sub>+A<sup>2</sup><sub>TO</sub>=<b>2</b>A<sup>2</sup><sub>TO </sub><br />|A(<b>16</b>)|<sub>2</sub>=(A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>2</sub>)<sup>2</sup>+(B<sub>1</sub>+B<sub>2</sub>)<sup>2</sup>=<b>4</b>A<sup>2</sup><sub>TO</sub>+<b>4</b>A<sup>2</sup><sub>TO</sub>=<b>8</b>A<sub>TO </sub><br />|A(<b>16</b>)|/|A(<b>4</b>)|=2
0262Accordingly, the 16 QAM signal can be transmitted at a two times greater amplitude and a four times greater transmitting energy than those needed for the 4 PSK signal. A modified 16 QAM signal according to the present invention will not be demodulated by a common receiver designed for symmetrical, equally distanced signal point QAM. However, it can be demodulated with the second receiver <b>33</b> when two threshold values A<sub>1 </sub>and A<sub>2 </sub>are preset to appropriate values. In <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 10</figref>, the minimum distance between two signal points in the first segment of the signal point group <b>91</b> is A<sub>1 </sub>and A<sub>2</sub>/<b>2</b>A<sub>1 </sub>is established as compared with the distance <b>2</b>A<sub>1 </sub>of 4 PSK. Then, as A<sub>1</sub>=A<sub>2</sub>, the distance becomes ½. This explains that the signal receiving sensitivity has to be two times greater for the same error rate and four times greater for the same signal level. For having a four times greater value of sensitivity, the radius r<sub>2 </sub>of the antenna <b>32</b> of the second receiver <b>33</b> has to be two times greater than the radius r<sub>1 </sub>of the antenna <b>22</b> of the first receiver <b>23</b> thus satisfying r<sub>2</sub>=<b>2</b>r<sub>1</sub>. For example, the antenna <b>32</b> of the second receiver <b>33</b> is 60 cm diameter when the antenna <b>22</b> if the first receiver <b>23</b> is 30 cm. In this manner, the second data stream representing the high frequency component of an HDTV will be carried on a signal channel and demodulated successfully. As the second receiver <b>33</b> intercepts the second data stream or a higher data signal, its owner can enjoy a of high return of investment return . Hence, the second receiver <b>33</b> of a high price may be accepted. As the minimum energy for transmission of 4 PSK data is predetermined, the ratio n<sub>16 </sub>of modified 16 APSK transmitting energy to 4 PSK transmitting energy will be calculated according to the antenna radius r<sub>2 </sub>of the second receiver <b>33</b> using a ratio between A<sub>1 </sub>and A<sub>2 </sub>shown in FIG. <b>10</b>.
0263In particular, n<sub>16 </sub>is expressed by ((A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>2</sub>)/A<sub>1</sub>)<sup>2 </sup>which is the minimum energy for transmission of 4 PSK data. As the signal point distance suited for modified 16 QAM interception is A<sub>2</sub>, Thethe signal point distance for 4 PSK interception is <b>2</b>A<sub>1</sub>, and the signal point distance ratio is A<sub>2</sub>/<b>2</b>A<sub>1</sub>, the antenna radius r<sub>2 </sub>is determined as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 11</figref>, in which the curve <b>101</b> represents the relationship between the transmitting energy ratio n<sub>16 </sub>and the radius r<sub>2 </sub>of the antenna <b>22</b> of the second receiver <b>23</b>.
0264Also, the point <b>102</b> indicates transmission of common 16 QAM at the equal distance signal state mode where the transmitting energy is nine times greater and thus will no more be practical. As apparent from the graph of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 11</figref>, the antenna radius r<sub>2 </sub>of the second receiver <b>23</b> cannot be reduced further even if n<sub>16 </sub>is increased more than 5 times.
0265The transmitting energy at the satellite is limited to a small value and thus, n<sub>16 </sub>preferably stays not more than 5 times the value, as denoted by the hatching of FIG. <b>11</b>. The point <b>104</b> within the hatching area <b>103</b> indicates, for example, that the antenna radius r<sub>2 </sub>of a two times greater value is matched with a 4× value of the transmitting energy. Also, the point <b>105</b> represents that the transmission energy should be doubled when r<sub>2 </sub>is about 5× greater. Those values are all within a feasible range.
0266The value of n<sub>16 </sub>not greater than 5× value is expressed using A<sub>1 </sub>and A<sub>2 </sub>as: <br />n<sub>16</sub>=((A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>2</sub>)/A<sub>1</sub>)<sup>2</sup><5 <br /> Hence, A<sub>2</sub><1.23A<sub>1</sub>.
0267If the distance between any two signal point group segments shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 10</figref> is <b>2</b>A(<b>4</b>) and the maximum amplitude is <b>2</b>A(<b>16</b>), A(<b>4</b>) and A(<b>16</b>)-A(<b>4</b>) are proportional to A<b>1</b>A<sub>1 </sub>and A<b>2</b>A<sub>2 </sub>respectively. Hence, (A(<b>16</b>))<sup>2</sup><5(A(<b>14</b>))<sup>2 </sup>is established.
0268The action of a modified 64 ASPK transmission will be described as the third receiver <b>43</b> can perform 64-state QAM demodulation.
0269<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 12</figref> is a vector diagram in which each signal point group segment contains 16 signal points as compared with 4 signal points of FIG. <b>10</b>. The first signal point group segment <b>91</b> in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 12</figref> has a 4×4 matrix of 16 signal points allocated at equal intervals including the point <b>170</b>. For providing compatibility with 4 PSK , A<sub>1</sub>>A<sub>TO </sub>has to be satisfied. If the radius of the antenna <b>42</b> of the third receiver <b>43</b> is r<sub>3 </sub>and the transmitting energy is n<sub>64</sub>, the equation is expressed as: <br />r<sub>3</sub><sup>2</sup>={6<sup>2</sup>/(n−1)}r<sub>1</sub><sup>2 </sup>
0270This relationship between r<sup>3</sup>r<sub>3 </sub>and n of a 64 QAM signal is also shown in the graphic representation of FIG. <b>13</b>.
0271It is understood that the signal point assignment shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 12</figref> allows the second receiver <b>33</b> to demodulate only two-bit patterns of 4 PSK data. Hence, it is desirable forto have compatibility betweenamong the first, second, and third receivers that the second receiver <b>33</b> is capable of demodulating a modified 16 QAM form from the 64 QAM modulated signal.
0272The compatibility betweenamong the three discrete receivers can be implemented by a three-level grouping of signal points, as illustrated in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 14. A</figref> description follows referring to the first quadrant in which the first signal point group segment <b>91</b> represents the two-bit pattern <b>11</b> of the first data stream.
0273In particular, a first sub segment <b>181</b> in the first signal point group segment <b>91</b> is assigned the two-bit pattern <b>11</b> of the second data stream. Equally, a second <b>182</b>, a third <b>183</b>, and a fourth sub segment <b>184</b> are assigned <b>01</b>, <b>00</b>, and <b>10</b> of the same respectively. This assignment is identical to that shown in FIG. <b>7</b>.
0274The signal point allocation of the third data stream will now be explained referring to the vector diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 15</figref> which shows the first quadrant. As shown, the four signal points <b>201</b>, <b>205</b>, <b>209</b>, and <b>213</b> represent the two-bit pattern of <b>11</b>, the signal points <b>202</b>, <b>206</b>, <b>210</b>, and <b>214</b> represent <b>01</b>, the signal points <b>203</b>, <b>207</b>, <b>211</b>, and <b>215</b> represent <b>00</b>, and signal points <b>204</b>, <b>208</b>, <b>212</b>, and <b>216</b> represent <b>10</b>. Accordingly, the two-bit patterns of the third data stream can be transmitted separately of the first and second data streams. In other words, two-bit data of the three different signal levels can be transmitted respectively.
0275As understood, the present invention permits not only transmission of six-bit data but also interception of three, two-bit, four-bit, and six-bit, different bit length data with their respective receivers while the signal compatibility remains between these levels.
0276The signal point allocation for providing compatibility betweenamong the three levels will be described.
0277As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 15</figref>, A<sub>1</sub>>A<sub>TO </sub>is essential for allowing the first receiver <b>23</b> to receive the first data stream.
0278It is necessary to space any two signal points from each other by such a distance that the sub segment signal points, e.g. <b>182</b>, <b>183</b>, <b>184</b>, of the second data stream shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 15</figref> can be distinguished from the signal point <b>91</b> shown in FIG. <b>10</b>.
0279<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 15</figref> shows that they are spaced by ⅔A<sub>2</sub>. In this case, the distance between the two signal points <b>201</b> and <b>202</b> in the first sub segment <b>181</b> is A<sub>2</sub>/6. The transmitting energy needed for signal interception with the third receiver <b>43</b> is now calculated. If the radius of the antenna <b>32</b><b>42</b>is r<sub>3 </sub>and the needed transmitting energy is n<sub>64 </sub>times the 4 PSK transmitting energy, the equation is expressed as: <br />R<sub>3</sub><sup>2</sup>(<b>12</b>r<sub>1</sub>)<sup>2</sup>/(n−<b>1</b>)R<sub>3</sub><sup>2</sup><i>=(<b>12</b>r</i><sub>1</sub><i>)</i><sup>2</sup><i>/(n−<b>1</b>) </i>
0280This relationship is also denoted by the curve <b>211</b> in FIG. <b>16</b>. For example, if the transmitting energy is 6 or 9 times greater than that for 4 PSK transmission at the point <b>223</b> or <b>222</b>, the antenna <b>32</b> having a radius of 8× or 6× value respectively can intercept the first, second, and third data streams for demodulation. As the signal point distance of the second data stream is close to ⅔A<sub>2</sub>, the relationship between r<sub>1 </sub>and r<sub>2 </sub>is expressed by: <br />R<sub>2</sub><b>2</b>=(<b>3</b>r<sub>1</sub>)<sup>2</sup>/(n−<b>1</b>)R<sub>2</sub><sup>2</sup><i>=(i <b>3</b>r</i><sub>1</sub><i>)</i><sup>2</sup><i>/(n−<b>1</b>) </i><br /> Therefore, the antenna <b>32</b> of the second receiver <b>33</b> has to be slightly increased in radius as denoted by the curve <b>223</b>.
0281As understood, while the first and second data streams are transmitted through a traditional satellite which provides a small signal transmitting energy, the third data stream can also be transmitted through a future satellite which provides a greater signal transmitting energy without interrupting the action of the first and second receivers <b>23</b> or <b>33</b> or with no need of modification of the same and thus, both the compatibility and the advancement is ensured.
0282The signal receiving action of the second receiver <b>33</b> will first be described. As compared with the first receiver <b>23</b> arranged for interception with a small radius r<sub>1 </sub>antenna and demodulation of the 4 PSK modulated signal of the digital transmitter <b>51</b> or the first data stream of the signal of the transmitter <b>1</b>, the second receiver <b>33</b> is adopted for perfectly demodulating the 16 signal state two-bit data, shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 10</figref>, or second data stream of the 16 QAM signal from the transmitter <b>1</b>. In total, four-bit data including also the first data stream can be demodulated. The ratio between A<sub>1 </sub>and A<sub>2 </sub>is however different in the two transmitters. The two different data are loaded to a demodulation controller <b>231</b> of the second receiver <b>33</b>, shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 21</figref>, which in turn supplies their respective threshold values to the demodulating circuit for AM demodulation.
0283The block diagram of the second receiver <b>33</b> in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 21</figref> is similar in basic construction to that of the first receiver <b>23</b> shown in FIG. <b>19</b>. The difference is that the radius r<sub>2 </sub>of the antenna <b>32</b> is greater than r<sub>1 </sub>of the antenna <b>22</b>. This allows the second receiver <b>33</b> to identify a signal component involving a smaller signal point distance. The demodulator <b>35</b> of the second receiver <b>33</b> also contains first and second data stream reproducing units <b>232</b> and <b>233</b> in addition to the demodulation controller <b>231</b>. There is provided a first discrimination/demodulation circuit <b>136</b> for AM demodulation of modified 16 QAM signals. As understood, each carrier is a four-bit signal having two, positive and negative, threshold values about the zero level. ASAs apparent from the vector diagram, of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 22</figref>, the threshold values are varied depending on the transmitting energy of a transmitter since the transmitting signal of the embodiment is a modified 16 QAM signal. When the reference threshold is TH<sub>16</sub>, it is determined by, as shown in FIG. <b>22</b>: <br />TH<sub>16</sub>=(A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>2</sub>/2)/(A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>2</sub>)
0284The various data for demodulation including A<sub>1 </sub>and A<sub>2 </sub>or TH<sub>16</sub>, and the value m for multiple-bit modulation are also transmitted from the transmitter <b>1</b> as carried in the first data stream. The demodulation controller <b>231</b> may be arranged for recovering such demodulation data through statistical process of the received signal.
0285A way of determining the shift factor A<sub>1</sub>/A<sub>2 </sub>will be described with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 26. A</figref> change of the shift factor A<sub>1</sub>/A<sub>2 </sub>causes a change of the threshold value. Increase of a difference of a value of A<sub>1</sub>/A<sub>2 </sub>set at the receiver side from a value of A<sub>1</sub>/A<sub>2 </sub>set at the transmitter side will increase the error rate. Referring to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 26</figref>, the demodulated signal from the second data stream reproducing unit <b>233</b> may be fed back to the demodulation controller <b>231</b> to change the shift factor A<sub>1</sub>/A<sub>2 </sub>in a direction to increase the error rate. By this arrangement, the third receiver <b>43</b> may not demodulate the shift factor A<sub>1</sub>/A<sub>2</sub>, so that the circuit construction can be simplified. Further, the transmitter may not transmit the shift factor A<sub>1</sub>/A<sub>2</sub>, so that the transmission capacity can be increased. This technique can be applied also to the second receiver <b>33</b>.
0286FIGS. <b>25</b>(a) and <b>25</b>(b) are views showing signal point allocations for the C-CDM signal points, wherein signal points are added by shifting in the polar coordinate direction (r,θ). The previously described C-CDM is characterized in that the signal points are shifted in the rectangular coordinate direction, i.e. XY direction; therefore it is referred to as rectangular coordinate system C-CDM. Meanwhile, this C-CDM characterized by the shifting of signal points in the polar coordinate direction, i.e. r, θ direction, is referred to as polar coordinate system C-CDM.
0287FIG. <b>25</b>(a) shows the signal allocation of 8PS-APSK signals, wherein four signal points are added by shifting each of 4 QPSK signals in the radius r direction of the polar coordinate system. In this manner, the APSK of polar coordinate system C-CDM having 8 signal points is obtained from the QPSK as shown in FIG. <b>25</b>(a). As the pole is shifted in the polar coordinate system to add signal points in this APSK, it is referred to as shifted pole-APSK, i.e. SP-APSK in the abbreviated form. In this case, coordinate values of the newly added four QPSK signals <b>85</b> are specified by using a shift factor S<sub>1 </sub>as shown in FIG. <b>139</b>. Namely, 8PS-APSK signal points includes ordinary QPSK signal points <b>83</b> (r<sub>0</sub>, θ<sub>0</sub>) and a signal point ((S<sub>1</sub>+1)(r<sub>0</sub>, θ<sub>0</sub>) obtained by shifting the signal point <b>83</b> in the radius r direction by an amount of S<sub>1</sub>r<sub>0</sub>. Thus, a 1-bit subchannel <b>2</b> is obtained in addition to a 2-bit subchannel <b>1</b> identical with the QPSK.
0288Furthermore, as shown in the constellation diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 140</figref>, new eight signal points, represented by coordinates (r<sub>0</sub>+S<sub>2</sub>r<sub>0</sub>, θ<sub>0</sub>) and (r<sub>0</sub>+S<sub>1</sub>r<sub>0</sub>+S<sub>2</sub>r<sub>0</sub>, θ<sub>0</sub>), can be added by shifting the eight signal points (r<sub>0</sub>, θ<sub>0</sub>) and (r<sub>0</sub>+S<sub>1</sub>r<sub>0</sub>, θ<sub>0</sub>) in the radius r direction. As this allows two kinds of allocations, a 1-bit subchannel is obtained and is referred to as 16PS-APSK which provides the 2-bit subchannel <b>1</b>, 1-bit subchannel <b>2</b>, and 1-bit subchannel <b>3</b>. As the 16-PS-APSK disposes the signal points on the lines of θ=¼(2n+1)π, it allows the ordinary QPSK receiver explained with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 19</figref> to reproduce the carrier wave to demodulate the first 2-bit subchannel although the second subchannel cannot be demodulated. As described above, the C-CDM method of shifting the signal points in the polar coordinate direction is useful in expanding the capacity of information data transmission while assuring compatibility to the PSK, especially to the QPSK receiver, a main receiver for the present satellite broadcast service. Therefore, without losing the first generation viewers of the satellite broadcast service based on the PSK, the broadcast service will advance to a second generation stage wherein the APSK will be used to increase transmittable information amount by use of the multi-level modulation while maintaining compatibility.
0289In FIG. <b>25</b>(b), the signal points are allocated on the lines of θ=π/8. With this arrangement, the 16 PSK signal points are reduced or limited to 12 signal points, i.e. 3 signal points in each quadrant. With this limitation, these three signal points in each quadrant are roughly regarded as one signal point for 4 QPSK signals. Therefore, this enables the QPSK receiver to reproduce the first subchannel in the same manner as in the previous embodiment.
0290More specifically, the signal points are disposed on the lines of θ=π/4, θ=π/4+π/8, and θ=π/4−π/8. In other words, the added signals are offset by an amount ±θ in the angular direction of the polar coordinate system from the QPSK signals disposed on the lines of θ=π/4. Since all the signals are in the range of θ=π/4±π/8, they can be regarded as one of the QPSK signal points on the line of θ=π/4. Although the error rate is lowered a little bit in this case, the QPSK receiver <b>23</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 19</figref> can discriminate these points as four signal points angularly allocated. Thus, 2-bit data can be reproduced.
0291In case of the angular shift C-CDM, if signal points are disposed on the lines of π/n, the carrier wave reproduction circuit can reproduce the carrier wave by the use of an n-multiplier circuit in the same manner as in other embodiments. If the signal points are not disposed on the lines of π/n, the carrier wave can be reproduced by transmitting several pieces of carrier information within a predetermined period in the same manner as in other embodimentembodiments. Assuming that an angle between two signal points of the QPSK or 8-SP-APSK is 2θ<sub>0 </sub>in the polar coordinate system and a first angular shift factor is P<b>1</b>, two signal points (r<sub>0</sub>, θ<sub>0</sub>+P<sub>1</sub>θ<sub>0</sub>) and (r<sub>0</sub>, %θ<sub>0</sub>−P<sub>1</sub>θ<sub>0</sub>) are obtained by shifting the QPSK signal point in the angular θ direction by an amount ±P<sub>1</sub>θ<sub>0</sub>. Thus, the number of signal points are doubled. Thus, the 1-bit subchannel <b>3</b> can be added and is referred to as 8-SP-PSK of P=P<b>1</b>. If eight signal points are further added by shifting the 8-SP-PSK signals in the radius r direction by an amount S<sub>1</sub>r<sub>0</sub>, it will become possible to obtain 16-SP-APSK (P, S<sub>1 </sub>type) as shown in FIG. <b>142</b>. The subchannels <b>1</b> and <b>2</b> can be reproduced by two 8PS-PSKs having the same phase. Returning to FIG. <b>25</b>(b), as the C-CDM based on the angular shift in the polar coordinate system can be applied to the PSK as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 141</figref>, this will be adopted to the first generation satellite broadcast service. However, if adopted to the second generation satellite broadcasting based on the APSK, this polar coordinate system C-CDM is inferior in that signal points in the same group cannot be uniformly spaced as shown in FIG. <b>142</b>. Accordingly, utilization efficiency of electrical power is worsened. On the other hand, the rectangular coordinate system C-CDM has good compatibility to the PSK.
0292The system shown in FIG. <b>25</b>(b) is compatible with both the rectangular and polar coordinate systems. As the signal points are disposed on the angular lines of the 16 PSK, they can be demodulated by the 16 PSK. Furthermore, as the signal points are divided into groups, the QPSK receiver can be used for demodulation. Still further, as the signal points are also allocated to suit the rectangular coordinate system, the demodulation will be performed by the 16-SRQAM. Consequently, the compatibility between the rectangular coordinate system C-CDM and the polar coordinate system C-CDM can be assured in any of the QPSK, 16PSK, and 16-SRQAM.
0293The demodulation controller <b>231</b> has a memory <b>231</b>a for storing therein different threshold values (i.e., the shift factors, the number of signal points, the synchronization rules, etc.) which correspond to different TV broadcast channels. When receiving one of the channels again, the values corresponding to the receiving channel will be read out of the memory to thereby stabilize the reception quickly.
0294If the demodulation data is lost, the demodulation of the second data stream will hardly be executed. This will be explained referring to a flowchart shown in FIG. <b>24</b>.
0295Even if the demodulation data is not available, demodulation of the 4 PSK at Step 313 and of the first data stream at Step 301 can be implemented. At Step 302, the demodulation data retrieved by the first data stream reproducing unit <b>232</b> is transferred to the demodulation controller <b>231</b>. If m is 4 or 2 at Step 303, the demodulation controller <b>231</b> triggers demodulation of 4 PSK or 2 PSK at Step 313. If not, the procedure moves to Step 310. At Step 305, two threshold values TH<sub>8 </sub>and TH16 are calculated. The threshold value TH<sub>16 </sub>for AM demodulation is fed at Step 306 from the demodulation controller <b>231</b> to both the first <b>136</b> and the second discrimination/demodulation circuit <b>137</b>. Hence, demodulation of the modified 16 QAM signal and reproduction of the second data stream can be carried out at Steps 307 and 315 respectively. At Step 308, the error rate is examined and if high, the procedure returns to Step 313 for repeating the 4 PSK demodulation.
0296As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 22</figref>and the signal points <b>85</b>, <b>83</b>, are aligned on a line at an angle of cos(ωt+nπ/2) while <b>84</b> and <b>86</b> are off the line. Hence, the feedback of a second data stream transmitting carrier wave data from the second data stream reproducing unit <b>233</b> to a carrier reproducing circuit <b>131</b> is carried out so that no carrier needs to be extracted at the timing of the signal points <b>84</b> and <b>86</b>.
0297The transmitter <b>1</b> is arranged to transmit carrier timing signals at intervals of a given time with the first data stream for the purpose of compensation for no demodulation of the second data stream. The carrier timing signal enables one to identify the signal points <b>83</b> and <b>85</b> of the first data stream regardless of demodulation of the second data stream. Hence, the reproduction of carrier wave can be triggered by the transmitting of carrier data to the carrier reproducing circuit <b>131</b>.
0298A determination then made at Step 304 of the flowchart of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 24</figref> as to whether or not m is <b>16</b> upon receipt of such a modified 64 QAM signal as shown in FIG. <b>23</b>. At Step 310, a determination is also made as to whether or not m is more than 64. If it is determined at Step 311 that the received signal has no equal distance signal point constellation, the procedure goes to Step 312. The signal point distance TH<sub>64 </sub>of the modified 64 QAM signal is calculated from:
0000TH<sub>64</sub>=(A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>2</sub>/2)/(A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>2</sub>)
0299This calculation is equivalent to that of TH<sub>16 </sub>but its resultant distance between signal points is smaller.
0300If the signal point distance in the first sub segment <b>181</b> is A<sub>3</sub>, the distance between the first <b>181</b> and the second sub segment <b>182</b> is expressed by (A<sub>2</sub>−<b>2</b>A<sub>3</sub>). Then, the average distance is (A<sub>2</sub>−<b>2</b>A<sub>3</sub>)/(A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>2</sub>) which is designated as d<sub>64</sub>, when d<sub>64 </sub>is smaller than T<sub>2 </sub>which represents the signal point discrimination capability of the second receiver <b>33</b>, any two signal points in the segment will hardly be distinguished from each other. This judgement is executed at Step 313. If d<sub>64 </sub>is out of a permissive range, the procedure moves back to Step 313 for 4 PSK mode demodulation. If d<sub>64 </sub>is within the range, the procedure advances to Step 305 for allowing the demodulation of 16 QAM at Step 307. If it is determined at Step 308 that the error rate is too high, the procedure goes back to Step 313 for 4 PSK mode demodulation.
0301When the transmitter <b>1</b> supplied a modified 8 QAM signal such as shown in FIG. <b>25</b>(a) in which all the signal points are at angles of cos (2πf+π/4), the carrier waves of the signal are lengthened to the same phase and will thus be reproduced with much ease. At the time, two-bit data of the first data stream are demodulated by the 4-PSK receiver while one-bit data of the second data stream is demodulated by the second receiver <b>33</b> and the total of three-bit data can be reproduced.
0302The third receiver <b>43</b> will be described in more detail. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 26</figref> shows a block diagram of the third receiver <b>43</b> similar to that of the second receiver <b>33</b> in FIG. <b>21</b>. The difference is that a third data stream reproducing unit <b>234</b> is added and also, the discrimination/demodulation circuit has a capability of identifying eight-bit data. The antenna <b>42</b> of the third receiver <b>43</b> has a radius r<sub>3 </sub>greater than r<sub>2 </sub>thus allowing smaller distance state signals, e.g. 32- or 64-state QAM signals, to be demodulated. For demodulation of the 64 QAM signal, the first discrimination/ reproduction circuit <b>136</b> has to identify 8 digital levels of the detected signal in which seven different threshold levels are involved. As one of the threshold values is zero, three are contained in the first quadrant.
0303<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 27</figref> shows a space diagram of the signal in which the first quadrant contains three different threshold values.
0304As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 27</figref>, when the three normalized threshold values are TH<b>1</b><sub>64</sub>, TH<b>2</b><sub>64</sub>, and TH<b>3</b><sub>64 </sub>they are expressed by: <br />TH<b>1</b><sub>64</sub>=(A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>3</sub>/2)/(A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>2</sub>) <br />TH<b>2</b><sub>64</sub>=(A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>2</sub>/2)/(A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>2</sub>) and <br />TH<b>3</b><sub>64</sub>=(A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>2</sub>−A<sub>3</sub>/2)/(A<sub>1</sub>+A<sub>2</sub>)
0305Through AM demodulation of a phase detected signal using the three threshold values, the third data stream can be reproduced like the first and second data stream explained with FIG. <b>21</b>. The third data stream contains e.g. four signal points <b>201</b>, <b>202</b>, <b>203</b>, and <b>204</b> at the first sub segment <b>181</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 23</figref> which represent 4 values of two-bit pattern. Hence, six digits or modified 64 QAM signals can be demodulated.
0306The demodulation controller <b>231</b> detects the value m, A<sub>1</sub>, A<sub>2</sub>, and A<sub>3 </sub>from the demodulation data contained in the first data stream demodulated by the first data stream reproducing unit <b>232</b> and calculates the three threshold values TH<b>1</b><sub>64</sub>, TH<b>2</b><sub>64</sub>, and TH<b>3</b><sub>64 </sub>which are then fed to the first <b>136</b> and the second discrimination/demodulation circuit <b>137</b> so that the modified 64 QAM signal is demodulated with certainty. Also, if the demodulation data have been scrambled, the modified 64 QAM signal can be demodulated only with a specific or subscriber receiver. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 28</figref> is a flowchart showing the action of the demodulation controller <b>231</b> for modified <b>64</b> QAM signals. The difference from the flowchart for demodulation of 16 QAM shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 24</figref> will be explained. The procedure moves from Step 304 to Step 320 where it is determined whether or not m=32 or not. If m=32, demodulation of 32 QAM signals is executed at Step 322. If not, the procedure moves to Step 321 where it is determined whether or not m=64. If yes, A<sub>3 </sub>is examined at Step 323. If A<sub>3 </sub>is smaller than a predetermined value, the procedure moves to Step 305 and the same sequence as of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 24</figref> is implemented. If it is judged at Step 323 that A<sub>3 </sub>is not smaller than the predetermined value, the procedure goes to Step 324 where the threshold values are calculated. At Step 325, the calculated threshold values are fed to the first and second discrimination/demodulation circuits and at Step 326, the demodulation of the modified 64 QAM signal is carried out. Then, the first, second, and third data streams are reproduced at Step 327. At Step 328, the error rate is examined. If the error rate is high, the procedure moves to Step 305 where the 16 QAM demodulation is repeated and if low, the demodulation of the 64 QAM is continued.
0307The action of carrier wave reproduction needed for execution of a satisfactory demodulating procedure will now be described. The scope of the present invention includes reproduction of the first data stream of a modified 16 or 64 QAM signal using a 4 PSK receiver. However, a common 4 PSK receiver rarely reconstructs carrier waves, thus failing to perform a correct demodulation. For compensation, some arrangements are necessary at both the transmitter and receiver sides.
0308Two techniques for compensation are provided according to the present invention. A first technique relates to transmission of signal points aligned at angles of (2n−1)π/4 at intervals of a given time. A second technique offers transmission of signal points arranged at intervals of an angle of nπ/8.
0309According to the first technique, the eight signal points including <b>83</b> and <b>85</b> are aligned at angles of π/4, 3π/4, 5π/4, and 7π/4, as shown in FIG. <b>38</b>. In action, at least one of the eight signal points is transmitted during sync time slot periods <b>452</b>, <b>453</b>, <b>454</b>, and <b>455</b> arranged at equal intervals of time in a time slot gap <b>451</b> shown in the time chart of FIG. <b>38</b>. Any desired signal points are transmitted during the other time slots. The transmitter <b>1</b> is also arranged to assign a data for the time slot interval to the sync timing data region <b>499</b> of a sync data block, as shown in FIG. <b>41</b>.
0310The content of a transmitting signal will be explained in more detail referring to FIG. <b>41</b>. The time slot group <b>451</b> containing the sync time slots <b>452</b>, <b>453</b>, <b>454</b>, and <b>455</b> represents a unit data stream or block <b>491</b> carrying a data of Dn.
0311The sync time slots in the signal are arranged at equal intervals of a given time determined by the time slot interval or sync timing data. Hence, when the arrangement of the sync time slots is detected, reproduction of carrier waves will be executed slot by slot through extracting the sync timing data from their respective time slots. Such a sync timing data S is contained in a sync block <b>493</b> at the front end of a data frame <b>492</b>, which consists of a number of sync time slots denoted by the hatching in FIG. <b>41</b>. Accordingly, the data to be extracted for carrier wave reproduction are increased, thus allowing the 4 PSK receiver to reproduce desired carrier waves at higher accuracy and efficiency.
0312The sync block <b>493</b> comprises sync data regions <b>496</b>, <b>497</b>, and <b>498</b>, —containing sync data S<b>1</b>, S<b>2</b>, and S<b>3</b>, —respectively which include unique words and demodulation data. The phase sync signal assignment region <b>499</b> is at the end of the sync block <b>493</b>, which holds a data of I<sub>T </sub>including information about interval arrangement and assignment of the sync time slots.
0313The signal point data in the phase sync time slot has a particular phase and can thus be reproduced by the 4 PSK receiver. Accordingly, I<sub>T </sub>in the phase sync signal assignment region <b>499</b> can be retrieved without error thus ensuring the reproduction of carrier waves atwith accuracy.
0314As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 41</figref>, the sync block <b>493</b> is followed by a demodulation data block <b>501</b> which contains demodulation data about threshold voltages needed for demodulation of the modified multiple-bit QAM signal. This data is essential for demodulation of the multiple-bit QAM signal and may preferably be contained in a region <b>502</b> which is a part of the sync block <b>493</b> for ease of retrieval.
0315<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 42</figref> shows the assignment of signal data for transmission of burst form signals through a TDMA method.
0316The assignment is distinguished from that of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 41</figref> by the fact that a guard period <b>521</b> is inserted between any two adjacent Dn data blocks <b>491</b> and <b>491</b> for interruption of the signal transmission. Also, each data block <b>491</b> is at the front end of a sync region <b>522</b>, the signal points at a phase of (2n−1)π/4 are only transmitted. Accordingly, the carrier wave reproduction will be feasible with the 4 PSK receiver. More specifically, the sync signal and carrier waves can be reproduced through the TDMA method.
0317The carrier wave reproduction of the first receiver <b>23</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 19</figref> will be explained in more detail referring to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 43 and 44</figref>. As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 43</figref>, an input signal is fed through the input unit <b>24</b> to a sync detector circuit <b>541</b> where it is sync detected. A demodulated signal from the sync detector <b>541</b> is transferred to an output circuit <b>542</b> for reproduction of the first data stream. A data of the phase sync signal assignment data region <b>499</b> (shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 41</figref>) is retrieved by an extracting timing controller circuit <b>543</b> so that the timing of sync signals of (2n−1)π/4 data can be acknowledged and transferred as a phase sync control pulse <b>561</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 44</figref> to a carrier reproduction controlling circuit <b>544</b>. Also, the demodulated signal of the sync detector circuit <b>541</b> is fed to a frequency multiplier circuit <b>545</b> where it is 4× multiplied prior to being transmitted to the carrier reproduction controlling circuit <b>544</b>. The resultant signal denoted by <b>562</b> in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 44</figref> contains true phase data <b>563</b> and other data. As illustrated by <b>564</b> in the time chart <b>564</b> of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 44</figref>, the phase sync time slots <b>452</b> carrying the (2n−1)π/4 data are also contained at equal intervals. In the carrier reproducing controlling circuit <b>544</b>, the signal <b>562</b> is sampled by the phase sync control pulse <b>561</b> to produce a phase sample signal <b>565</b> which is then converted through a sample and hold operation into a phase signal <b>566</b>. The phase signal <b>566</b> of the carrier reproduction controlling circuit <b>544</b> is fed through a loop filter <b>546</b> to a VCO <b>547</b> where its relevant carrier wave is reproduced. The reproduced carrier is then sent to the sync detector circuit <b>541</b>.
0318In this manner, the signal point data of the (2n−1)π/4 phase denoted by the shaded areas in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 39</figref> is recovered and utilized so that a correct carrier wave can be reproduced by 4× or 16× frequency multiplication. Although a plurality of phases are reproduced at the time, the absolute phases of the carrier can be successfully be identified using a unique word assigned to the sync region <b>496</b> shown in FIG. <b>41</b>.
0319For transmission of a modified 64 QAM signal such as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 40</figref>, signal points in the phase sync areas <b>471</b> at the (2n−1)π/4 phase denoted by the hatching are assigned to the sync time slots <b>452</b>, <b>452</b>b, etc. Its carrier can hardly be reproduced with a common 4 PSK receiver but can be successfully reproduced with the first receiver <b>23</b> of 4 PSK mode provided with the carrier reproducing circuit of the embodiment.
0320The foregoing carrier reproducing is of COSTAS type. A carrier reproducing circuit of the reverse modulation type will now be explained according to the embodiment.
0321<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 45</figref> shows a reverse modulation type carrier reproducing circuit according to the present invention, in which a received signal is fed from the input unit <b>24</b> to a sync detector circuit <b>541</b> for producing a demodulated signal. Also, the input signal is delayed by a first delay circuit <b>591</b> to a delay signal. The delay signal is then transferred to a quadrature phase modulator circuit <b>592</b> where it is reverse demodulated by the demodulated signal from the sync detector circuit <b>541</b> to a carrier signal. The carrier signal is fed through a carrier reproduction controller circuit <b>544</b> to a phase comparator <b>593</b>. A carrier wave produced by a VCO <b>547</b> is delayed by a second delay circuit <b>594</b> into a delay signal which is also fed to the phase comparator <b>593</b>. At the phase comparator <b>593</b>, the reverse demodulated carrier signal is compared in phase with the delay signal thus producing a phase difference signal. The phase difference signal is fed through a loop filter <b>546</b> to the VCO <b>547</b> which in turn produces a carrier wave arranged in phase with the received carrier wave. In the same manner as of the COSTAS carrier reproducing circuit shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 43</figref>, an extracting timing controller circuit <b>543</b> performs sampling of signal points contained in the hatching areas of FIG. <b>39</b>. Accordingly, the carrier wave of a 16 or 64 QAM signal can be reproduced with the 4 PSK demodulator of the first receiver <b>23</b>.
0322The reproduction of a carrier wave by 16× frequency multiplication will be explained. The transmitter <b>1</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 1</figref> is arranged to modulate and transmit a modified 16 QAM signal with assignment of its signal points at nπ/8 phase as shown in FIG. <b>46</b>. At the first receiver <b>23</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 19</figref>, the carrier wave can be reproduced with its COSTAS carrier reproduction controller circuit containing a 16× multiplier circuit <b>661</b> shown in FIG. <b>48</b>. The signal points at each nπ/8 phase shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 46</figref> are processed at the first quadrant b the action of the 16× multiplier circuit <b>661</b>, whereby the carrier will be reproduced by the combination of a loop filter <b>546</b> and a VCO <b>541</b><b>547</b>. Also, the absolute phase may be determined from 16 different phases by assigning a unique word to the sync region.
0323The arrangement of the 16× multiplier circuit will be explained referring to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 48. A</figref> sum signal and a difference signal are produced from the demodulated signal by an adder circuit <b>662</b> and a subtractor circuit <b>663</b> respectively and then, multiplied together by a multiplier <b>664</b> into a cos <b>2</b>θ signal. Also, a multiplier <b>665</b> produces a sin <b>2</b>θ signal. The two signals are then multiplied by a multiplier <b>666</b> into a sin <b>4</b>θ signal.
0324Similarly, a sin <b>8</b>θ signal is produced from the two, sin <b>2</b>θ and cos <b>2</b>θ, signals by the combination of an adder circuit <b>667</b>, a subtracter circuit <b>668</b>, and a multiplier <b>670</b>. Furthermore, a sin <b>16</b>θ signal is produced by the combination of an adder circuit <b>671</b>, a subtractor circuit <b>672</b>, and a multiplier <b>673</b>. Then, the 16× multiplication is completed.
0325Through the foregoing 16× multiplication, the carrier wave of all the signal points of the modified 16 QAM signal shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 46</figref> will successfully be reproduced without extracting particular signal points.
0326However, reproduction of the carrier wave of the modified 64 QAM signal shown in FIG. <b>47</b> can involve an increase in the error rate due to dislocation of some signal points from the sync areas <b>471</b>.
0327Two techniques are known for compensation for the consequences. One is inhibiting transmission of the signal points dislocated from the sync areas. This causes the total amount of transmitted data to be reduced but allows the arrangement to be facilitated. The other is providing the sync time slots as described in FIG. <b>38</b>. In more particular, the signal points in the nπ/8 sync phase areas, e.g. <b>471</b> and <b>471</b>a, are transmitted during the period of the corresponding sync time slots in the time slot group <b>451</b>. This triggers an accurate synchronizing action during the period thus minimizing phase error.
0328As now understood, the 16× multiplication allows the simple 4 PSK receiver to reproduce the carrier wave of a modified 16 or 64 QAM signal. Also, the insertion of the sync time slots causes the phasic accuracy to be increased during the reproduction of carrier waves from a modified 64 QAM signal.
0329As set forth above, the signal transmission system of the present invention is capable of transmitting a plurality of data on a single carrier wave simultaneously in the multiple signal level arrangement.
0330More specifically, three different level receivers which have discrete characteristics of signal intercepting sensitivity and demodulating capability are provided in relation to one single transmitter so that any one of them can be selected depending on a wanted data size to be demodulated which is proportional to the price. When the first receiver of low resolution quality and low price is acquired together with a small antenna, its owner can intercept and reproduce the first data stream of a transmission signal. When the second receiver of medium resolution quality and medium price is acquired together with a medium antenna, its owner can intercept and reproduce both the first and second data streams of the signal. When the third receiver of high resolution quality and high price is acquired with a large antenna, its owner can intercept and reproduce all the first, second, and third data streams of the signal.
0331If the first receiver is a home-use digital satellite broadcast receiver of low price, it will overwhelmingly be welcome by a majority of viewers. The second receiver accompanied with the medium antenna costs more and will be accepted by not common viewers but particular people who want to enjoy HDTV services. The third receiver accompanied with the large antenna at least before the satellite output is increased, is not appropriate for home use and will possibly be used in relevant industries. For example, the third data stream carrying super HDTV signals is transmitted via a satellite to subscriber cinemas which can thus play video tapes rather than traditional movie films and run movies at low cost.
0332When the present invention is applied to a TV signal transmission service, three different quality pictures are carried on one signal channel wave and will offer compatibility with each other. Although the first embodiment refers to a 4 PK, a modified 8 QAM, a modified 16 QAM, and a modified 64 QAM signal, other signals will also be employed with equal success including a 32 QAM, a 256 QAM, an 8 PSK, and a 16 PSK, and a 32 PSK signal. It would be understood that the present invention is not limited to a satellite transmission system and can be applied to a terrestrial communications system or a cable transmission system.
0333The transmission method of the invention can also be applied to a 4-level or 8-level ASK signal as shown in FIG. <b>58</b> and FIGS. <b>68</b>(a) and (b), respectively.
EMBODIMENT 2
0334A second embodiment of the present invention is featured in which the physical multi-level arrangement of the first embodiment is divided into small levels through e.g. discrimination in error correction capability, thus forming a logic multi-level construction. In the first embodiment, each multi-level channel has different levels in the electricalelectric signal amplitude or physical demodulating capability. The second embodiment offers different levels in the logic reproduction capability such as error correction. For example, the data D<sub>1 </sub>in a multi-level channel is divided into two, D<sub>1-1 </sub>and D<sub>1-2</sub>, components and D<sub>1-1 </sub>is more increased in the error correction capability than D<sub>1-2 </sub>for discrimination. Accordingly, as the error detection and correction capability is different between D<sub>1-1 </sub>and D<sub>1-2 </sub>at demodulation, D<sub>1-1 </sub>can successfully be reproduced within a given error rate when the C/N level of an original transmitting signal is as low as disenabling the reproduction of D<sub>1-2</sub>. This will be implemented using the logic multi-level arrangement.
0335More specifically, the logic multi-level arrangement consists of dividing data of a modulated multi-level channel and discriminating distances between error correction codes by mixing error correction codes with product codes for varying error correction capability. Hence, a more multi-level signal can be transmitted.
0336In fact, a D<sub>1-1 </sub>channel is divided into two sub channels D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>1-2 </sub>and a D<sub>2 </sub>channel is divided into two sub channels D<sub>2-1 </sub>and D<sub>2-2</sub>.
0337This will be explained in more detail referring to FIG. <b>87</b><b>85</b>in which D<sub>1-1 </sub>is reproduced from a lowest C/N signal. If the C/N rate is d at minimum, three components D<sub>1-2</sub>, D<sub>2-1 </sub>and D<sub>2-2 </sub>cannot be reproduced while D<sub>1-1 </sub>is reproduced. If C/N is not less than c, D<sub>1-2 </sub>can also be reproduced. Equally, when C/N is b, D<sub>2-1 </sub>is reproduced and when C/N is a, D<sub>2-2 </sub>is reproduced. As the C/N rate increases, the reproducible signal levels are increased in number. The lower the C/N, the fewer the reproducible signal levels. This will be explained in the form of relationship between transmitting distance and reproducible C/N value referring to FIG. <b>86</b>. In common, the C/N value of a received signal is decreased in proportion to the distance of transmission as expressed by the real line <b>861</b> in FIG. <b>86</b>. It is now assumed that the distance from a transmitter antenna to a receiver antenna is La when C/N=a, Lb when C/N=b, Lc when C/N=c, Ld when C/N=d, and Le when C/N=e. If the distance from the transmitter antenna is greater than Ld, D<sub>1-1 </sub>can be reproduced as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 85</figref> where the receivable area <b>862</b> is denoted by the hatching. In other words, D<sub>1-1 </sub>can be reproduced within a most extended area. Similarly, D<sub>1-2 </sub>can be reproduced in an area <b>863</b> when the distance is not more than Lc. In this area <b>863</b> containing the area <b>862</b>, D<sub>1-1 </sub>can with no doubt be reproduced. In a small area <b>854</b><b>864</b>, D<sub>2-1 </sub>can be reproduced and in a smallest area <b>865</b>, D<sub>2-2 </sub>can be reproduced. As understood, the different data levels of a channel can be reproduced corresponding to degrees of declination in the C/N rate. The logic multi-level arrangement of the signal transmission system of the present invention can provide the same effect as of a traditional analogue transmission system in which the amount of receivable data is gradually lowered as the C/N rate decreases.
0338The construction of the logic multi-level arrangement will be described in which there are provided two physical levels and two logic levels. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 87</figref> is a block diagram of a transmitter <b>1</b> which is substantially identical in construction to that shown in FIG. <b>2</b> and described previously in the first embodiment and will not be further explained in detail. The only difference is that error correction code encoders are added as abbreviated to ECC encoders. The divider circuit <b>3</b> has four outputs <b>1</b>-<b>1</b>, <b>1</b>-<b>2</b>, <b>2</b>-<b>1</b>, and <b>2</b>-<b>2</b> through which four signals D<sub>1-1</sub>, D<sub>1-2</sub>, D<sub>2-1</sub>, and D<sub>2-2 </sub>divided from an input signal are delivered. The two signals D<sub>1-1 </sub>and D<sub>1-2 </sub>are fed to two, main and sub, ECC encoders <b>872</b>a and <b>873</b>a of a first ECC encoder <b>871</b>a respectively for converting to error correction code forms.
0339The main ECC encoder <b>872</b>A has a higher error correction capability than that of the sub ECC encoder <b>873</b>a. Hence, D<sub>1-1 </sub>can be reproduced at a lower rate of C/N than D<sub>1-2 </sub>as apparent from the CN-level diagram of FIG. <b>85</b>. More particularly, the logic level of D<sub>1-1 </sub>is less affected by declination of the C/N than that of D<sub>1-2</sub>. After error correction code encoding, D<sub>1-1 </sub>and D<sub>2-2</sub>D<sub>1-2 </sub>are summed by a summer <b>874</b>a to a D<sub>1 </sub>signal which is then transferred to the modulator <b>4</b>. The other two signals D<sub>2-1 </sub>and D<sub>2-2 </sub>of the divider circuit <b>3</b> are error correction encoded by two, main and sub, ECC encoders <b>872</b> b<b>872</b>b and <b>873</b>b of a second ECC encoder <b>871</b>b respectively and then, summed by a summer <b>874</b>b to a D<sub>2 </sub>signal which is transmitted to the modulator <b>4</b>. The main ECC encoder <b>872</b>b is higher in the error correction capability than the sub ECC encoder <b>873</b>b. The modulator <b>4</b> in turn produces from the two, D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2</sub>, input signals a multi-level modulated signal which is further transmitted from the transmitter unit <b>5</b>. As understood, the output signal from the transmitter <b>1</b> has two physical levels D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>and also, four logic levels D<sub>1-1</sub>, D<sub>1-2</sub>, D<sub>2-1</sub>, and D<sub>2-2 </sub>based on the two physical levels for providing different error correction capabilities.
0340The reception of such a multi-level signal will be expelainedexplained. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 88</figref> is a block diagram of a second receiver <b>33</b> which is almost identical in construction to that shown in FIG. <b>21</b> and described in the first embodiment. The second receiver <b>33</b> arranged for intercepting multi-level signals from the transmitter <b>1</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 87</figref> further comprises first and second ECC decoder <b>876</b>a <b>876</b>b, in which the demodulation of QAM, or any of ASK, PSK, and FSK if desired, is executed.
0341As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 88</figref>, a receiver signal is demodulated by the demodulator <b>35</b> to the two, D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2</sub>, signals which are then fed to two dividers <b>3</b>a and <b>3</b>b respectively where they are divided into four logic levels D<sub>1-1</sub>, D<sub>1-2</sub>, D<sub>2-1</sub>, and D<sub>2-2</sub>. The four signals are transferred to the first and second ECC decoders <b>876</b>a and <b>876</b>b in which D<sub>1-1 </sub>is error corrected by a main ECC decoder <b>877</b>a, D<sub>1-2 </sub>by a sub ECC decoder <b>878</b>a, D<sub>2-1 </sub>by a main ECC decoder <b>877</b>b, D<sub>2-2 </sub>by a sub ECC decoder <b>878</b>b before all being sent to the summer <b>37</b>. In the mixer <b>37</b>, the four, D<sub>1-1</sub>, D<sub>1-2</sub>, D<sub>2-1</sub>, and D<sub>2-2</sub>, error corrected signals are combined into a signal which is then delivered from the output unit <b>36</b>.
0342Since D<sub>1-1 </sub>and D<sub>2-2 </sub>are higher in the error correction capability than D<sub>1-2 </sub>and D<sub>2-2 </sub>respectively, the error rate remains less than a given value although C/N is fairly low as shown in FIG. <b>85</b> and thus, an original signal will be reproduced successfully.
0343The action of discriminating the error correction capability between the main ECC decoders <b>877</b>a and <b>877</b>b of high code gain and the sub ECC decoders <b>878</b>a and <b>878</b>b of low code gain will now be described in more detail. It is a good idea for having a difference in the error correction capability, i.e., in the code gain, to use in the sub ECC decoder a common coding technique, e.g. Reed-Solomon or BCH method, as shown in FIG. <b>165</b>(b) for the ECC decoder, having a standard code distance and in %hethe main ECC decoder, another encoding technique in which distance between correction codes is increased using Reed-Solomon codes, their product codes, or other long-length codes or a trellis decoder <b>744</b>p, <b>744</b>q, and <b>744</b>r shown in FIGS. <b>128</b>(d), <b>128</b>(e), <b>128</b>(f). A variety of known techniques for increasing the error correction code distance have been introduced and will not be explained in detail. The present invention can be associated with any known technique for having the logic multi-level arrangement.
0344Also, as shown in the block diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 160 and 167</figref>, the transmitter further has an interleaver <b>744</b>k and the receiver further has de-interleavers <b>759</b>k and <b>936</b>b. The interleave process is carried out by the use of the Interleave Table <b>954</b> shown in FIG. <b>168</b>(a). De-interleave RAM <b>936</b>x in the de-interleaver <b>936</b>b is used for decoding the data. By this arrangement, the data transmission system having high reliability with respect to the burst error can be realized, resulting in stable transmitted images.
0345The logic multi-level arrangement will be explained in conjuctionconjunction with a diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 89</figref> showing the relationship between C/N and error racerate after error correction. As shown, the straight line <b>881</b> represents D<sub>1-1 </sub>at the C/N and error rate relation and the line <b>882</b> represents D<sub>1-2 </sub>at same.
0346As the C/N rate of an input signal decreases, the error rate increases after error correction. If C/N is lower than a given value, the error rate exceeds a reference value Eth determined by the system design standards and no original data will normally be reconstructed. When C/N is lowered to less than e, the D<sub>1 </sub>signal fails to be reproduced as expressed by the line <b>881</b> of D<sub>1-1 </sub>in FIG. <b>89</b>. When e≦C/N<d, D<sub>1-1 </sub>of the D<sub>1 </sub>signal exhibits a higher error rate than Eth and will not be reproduced.
0347When C/N is d at the point <b>885</b>d, D<sub>1-1 </sub>having a higher error correction capability than D<sub>1-2 </sub>becomes not higher in the error rate than Eth and can be reproduced. At the time, the error rate of D<sub>1-2 </sub>remains higher than Eth after error correction and will no longer be reproduced.
0348When C/N is increased up to c at the point <b>885</b>c, D<sub>1-2 </sub>becomes not higher in the error rate than Eth and can be reproduced. At the time, D<sub>2-1 </sub>and D<sub>2-2 </sub>remain in no demodulation state. After the C/N rate is increased further to b′, the D<sub>2 </sub>signal becomes ready to be demodulated.
0349When C/N is increased to b at the point <b>885</b>b, D<sub>2-1 </sub>of the D<sub>2 </sub>signal becomes not higher in the error rate than Eth and can be reproduced. At the time, the error rate of D<sub>2-2 </sub>remains higher than Eth and will not be reproduced. When C/N is increased up to a at the point <b>885</b>a, D<sub>2-2 </sub>becomes not higher than Eth and can be reproduced.
0350As described above, the four different signal logic levels divided from two, D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2</sub>, physical levels through discrimination of the error correction capability between the levels, can be transmitted simultaneously.
0351Using the logic multi-level arrangement of the present invention with a multi-level construction in which at least a part of the original signal is reproduced even if data in a higher level is lost, digital signal transmission will successfully be executed without losing the advantageous effect of an analogue signal transmission in which transmitting data is gradually decreased as the C/N rate becomes low.
0352ThankingThanks to up-to-date compression techniques, compressed image data can be transmitted in the logic multi-level arrangement for enabling a receiver station to reproduce a higher quality image than that of an analogue system and also, with not sharply but at steps declining the signal level for ensuring signal interception in a wider area. The present invention can provide an extra effect of the multi-layer arrangement which is hardly implemented by a known digital signal transmission system without deteriorating high quality image data.
0353In addition, the address data of the image segment data, the base image data for image compression, the scramble cancellation data shown in the descrambler (FIG. <b>66</b>), and high priority (HP) data, i.e., the data (e.g., the frame synchronization signal and header) that is most essential to image expansion of the HDTV signal, is transmitted as D<sub>1-1 </sub>by the high code gain ECC encoder <b>743</b>a (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 88</figref>, <b>133</b>, <b>170</b>, and <b>172</b>), and is received by the high code gain ECC decoder <b>758</b> of the receiver <b>43</b>.
0354This high priority data is protected because the error rate of priority data D<sub>1-1 </sub>does not increase noticeably. Fatal deterioration of the characteristic image quality of digital video transmissions is thus avoided, and a “graceful degradation” effect whereby image quality gradually deteriorates is obtained. The modulator <b>749</b> and demodulator <b>760</b> of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 133 and 170</figref>, respectively, can achieve this graceful degradation effect with 16-level QAM and 32-level QAM described above, 4-level VSB (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 57</figref>) and 8-level VSB (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 68</figref>) described below in the description of the fourth embodiment, and 8-level PSK.
0355Furthermore, as shown in the block diagrams of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 133 and 156</figref>, a big difference in the error rate of high priority data and low priority data can be created during signal reception by applying high code gain error correction coding of the high priority data by means of the ECC encoder <b>744</b>a and trellis encoder <b>744</b>b in the 2nd data stream input <b>744</b>, while error correction encoding the low priority data with low code gain by the ECC encoder <b>743</b>a only.
0356As a result, even if the C/N ratio of the transmission system deteriorates significantly, the high priority data can be received. Therefore, while the image quality deteriorates with the deterioration of the low priority data, the high priority data can also be reproduced in applications subject to severe C/N ratio deterioration, as found in the reception conditions encountered with mobile television receivers, and the pixel block positioning information is also reproduced. Because image block destruction is thus prevented, viewers are still able to receive and view broadcast programing under extremely poor reception conditions.
EMBODIMENT 3
0357A third embodiment of the present invention will be described referring to the relevant drawings.
0358<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 29</figref> is a schematic total view illustrating the third embodiment in the form of a digital TV broadcasting system. An input video signal <b>402</b> of super high resolution TV image is fed to an input unit <b>403</b> of a first video encoder <b>401</b>. Then, the signal is divided by a divider circuit <b>404</b> into three, first, second, and third, data streams which are transmitted to a compressing circuit <b>405</b> for data compression before being further delivered.
0359Equally, other three input video signals <b>406</b>, <b>407</b>, and <b>408</b> are fed to a second <b>409</b>, a third <b>410</b>, and a fourth video encoder <b>411</b> respectively which all are arranged identical in construction to the first video encoder <b>401</b> for data compression.
0360The four first data streams from their respective encoders <b>401</b>, <b>409</b>, <b>410</b>, and <b>411</b> are transferred to a first multiplexer <b>413</b> of a multiplexer <b>412</b> where they are time multiplexed by a TDM process into a first data stream multiplex signal which is fed to a transmitter <b>1</b>.
0361A part or all of the four second data streams from their respective encoders <b>401</b>, <b>409</b>, <b>410</b>, and <b>411</b> are transferred to a second multiplexer <b>414</b> of the multiplexer <b>412</b> where they are time multiplexed to a second data stream multiplex signal which is then fed to transmitter <b>1</b>. Also, a part or all of the four third data streams are transferred to a third multiplexer <b>415</b> where they are time multiplexed to a data stream multiplex signal which is then fed to the transmitter <b>1</b>.
0362The transmitter <b>1</b> performs modulation of the three data stream signals with its modulator <b>4</b> by the same manner as described in the first embodiment. The modulated signals are sent from a transmitter unit <b>5</b> through an antenna <b>6</b> and an uplink <b>7</b> to a transponder <b>12</b> of a satellite <b>10</b> which in turn transmits it to three different receivers including a first receiver <b>23</b>.
0363The modulated signal transmitted through a downlink <b>21</b> is intercepted by a small antenna <b>22</b> having a radius r<sub>1 </sub>and fed to a first data stream reproducing unit <b>232</b> of the first receiver <b>23</b> where its first data stream only is demodulated. The demodulated first data stream is then converted by a first video decoder <b>421</b> to a traditional <b>425</b> or wide-picture NTSC or video output signal <b>426</b> of low image resolution.
0364Also, the modulated signal transmitted through a downlink <b>31</b> is intercepted by a medium antenna <b>32</b> having a radius r<sub>2 </sub>and fed to a first <b>232</b> and a second data stream reproducing unit <b>233</b> of a second receiver <b>33</b> where its first and second data streams are demodulated respectively. The demodulated first and second data streams are then summed and converted by a second video decoder <b>422</b> to an HDTV or video output signal <b>427</b> of high image resolution and/or to the video output signals <b>425</b> and <b>426</b>.
0365Also, the modulated signal transmitted through a downlink <b>41</b> is intercepted by a large antenna <b>42</b> having a radius r<sub>3 </sub>and fed to a first <b>232</b>, a second <b>233</b>, and a third data steam reproducing unit <b>234</b> of a third receiver <b>43</b> where its first, second, and third data streams are demodulated respectively. The demodulated first, second, and third data streams are then summed and converted by a third video decoder <b>423</b> to a super HDTV or video output signal <b>428</b> of super high image resolution for use in a video theater or cinema. The video output signals <b>425</b>, <b>426</b>, and <b>427</b> can also be reproduced if desired. A common digital TV signal is transmitted from a conventional digital transmitter <b>51</b> and when intercepted by the first-receiver <b>23</b>, will be converted to the video output signal <b>426</b> such as a low resolution NTSC TV signal.
0366The first video encoder <b>401</b> will now be explained in more detail referring to the block diagram of FIG. <b>30</b>. An input video signal of super high resolution is fed through the input unit <b>403</b> to the divider circuit <b>404</b> where it is divided into four components by sub-band coding process. In particular, the input video signal is separated by passing through a horizontal lowpass filter <b>451</b> and a horizontal highpass filter <b>452</b> of e.g. QAM mode to two, low and high, horizontal frequency components which are then subsampled into half of their quantities by two subsamplers <b>453</b> and <b>454</b> respectively. The low horizontal component is filtered by a vertical lowpass filter <b>455</b> and a vertical highpass filter <b>456</b> into a low horizontal low vertical component or H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>signal and a low horizontal high vertical component or H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H </sub>signal respectively. The two, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>and H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, signals are then subsampled into one half by two subsamblers <b>457</b> and <b>458</b> respectively and transferred to the compressing circuit <b>405</b>.
0367The high horizontal component is filtered by a vertical lowpass filter <b>459</b> and a vertical highpass filter <b>460</b> into a high horizontal low vertical highpass component or H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L </sub>signal and a high horizontal high vertical component or H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H </sub>signal respectively. The two, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L </sub>and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, signals are then subsampled into one half by two subsamplers <b>461</b> and <b>462</b> respectively and transferred to the compressing circuit <b>405</b>.
0368The H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>signal is preferably DCT compressed by a first compressor <b>471</b> of the compressing circuit <b>405</b> and fed to a first output circuit <b>472</b> as the first data stream.
0369Also, the H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H </sub>signal is compressed by a second compressor <b>473</b> and fed to a second output circuit <b>464</b>. The H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L </sub>signal is compressed by a third compressor <b>463</b> and fed to the second output circuit <b>464</b>.
0370The H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H </sub>signal is divided by a divider <b>465</b> into two high resolution (H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>1) and super high resolution (H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>2) video signals which are then transferred to the second output circuit <b>464</b> and a third output circuit <b>468</b> respectively.
0371The first video decoder <b>421</b> will now be explained in more detail referring to FIG. <b>31</b>. The first data stream or D<sub>1 </sub>signal of the first receiver <b>23</b> is fed through an input unit <b>501</b> to a descrambler <b>502</b> of the first video decoder <b>421</b> where it is descrambled. The descrambled D<sub>1 </sub>signal is expanded by an expander <b>503</b> to H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>which is then fed to an aspect ratio changing circuit <b>504</b>. Thus, the H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>signal can be delivered through an output unit <b>505</b> as a standard <b>500</b>, letterbox format <b>507</b>, wide-screen <b>508</b>, or sidepanel format NTSC signal <b>509</b>. The scanning format may be of non-interlace or interlace type and its NTSC mode lines may be 525 or doubled to 1050 by double tracing. When the received signal from the digital transmitter <b>51</b> is a digital TV signal of 4 PSK mode, it can also be converted by the first receiver <b>23</b> and the first video decoder <b>421</b> to a TV picture. The second video decoder <b>422</b> will be explained in more detail referring to the block diagram of FIG. <b>32</b>. The D<sub>1 </sub>signal of the second receiver <b>33</b> is fed through a first input <b>521</b> to a first expander <b>522</b> for data expansion and then, transferred to an oversampler <b>523</b> where it is sampled at 2x. The oversampled signal is filtered by a vertical lowpass filter <b>524</b> into H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>. Also, the D<sub>2 </sub>signal of the second receiver <b>33</b> is fed through a second input <b>530</b> to a divider <b>531</b> where it is divided into three components which are then transferred to second, third, and fourth expanders <b>532</b>-<b>534</b> respectively for data expansion. The three expanded components are sampled at 2x by three oversamplers <b>535</b>, <b>536</b>, and <b>537</b> and filtered by a vertical highpass <b>538</b>, a vertical lowpass <b>539</b>, and a vertical highpass filter <b>540</b> respectively. Then, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>from the vertical lowpass filter <b>524</b> and H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H </sub>from the vertical highpass filter <b>538</b> are summed by an adder <b>525</b>, sampled by an oversampler <b>541</b>, and filtered by a horizontal lowpass filter <b>542</b> into a low frequency horizontal video signal. H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L </sub>from the vertical lowpass filter <b>539</b> and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>1 from the vertical highpass filter <b>540</b> are summed by an adder <b>526</b>, sampled by an oversampler <b>544</b>, and filtered by a horizontal highpass filter <b>545</b> to a high frequency horizontal video signal. The two, high and low frequency, horizontal video signals are then summed by an adder <b>543</b> into a high resolution video signal HD which is further transmitted through an output unit <b>546</b> as a video output <b>547</b> of e.g. HDTV format. If desired a traditional NTSC video output can be reconstructed with equal success.
0372<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 33</figref> is a block diagram of the third video decoder <b>423</b> in which the D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>signals are fed through a first <b>521</b> and a second input <b>530</b> respectively to a high frequency band video decoder circuit <b>527</b> where they are converted to an HD signal in the same manner as described above. The D<sub>3 </sub>signal is fed through a third input <b>551</b> to a super high frequency band video decoder circuit <b>552</b> where it is expanded, descrambled, and composed into H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>2 signal. The HD signal of the high frequency band video decoder circuit <b>527</b> and the H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>2 signal of the super high frequency band video decoder circuit <b>552</b> are summed by a summer <b>553</b> to a super high resolution TV or S-HD signal which is then delivered through an output unit <b>554</b> as a super resolution video output <b>555</b>.
0373The action of multiplexing in the multiplexer <b>412</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 29</figref> will be explained in more detail. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 34</figref> illustrates a data assignment in which the three, first, second, and third, data streams D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>, D<sub>3 </sub>contain in a period of T six NTSC channel data L<b>1</b>, L<b>2</b>, L<b>3</b>, L<b>4</b>, L<b>5</b>, L<b>6</b>, six HDTV channel data M<b>1</b>, M<b>2</b>, M<b>3</b>, M<b>4</b>, M<b>5</b>, M<b>6</b> and six S-HDTV channel data H<b>1</b>, H<b>2</b>, H<b>3</b>, H<b>4</b>, H<b>5</b>, H<b>6</b> respectively. In operation, the NTSC or D<sub>1 </sub>signal data L<b>1</b> to L<b>6</b> are time multiplexed by TDM process during the period T. More particularly, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>of D<sub>1 </sub>is assigned to a domain <b>601</b> for the first channel. Then, a difference data M<b>1</b> between HDTV and NTSC or a sum of H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>1 is assigned to a domain <b>602</b> for the first channel. Also, a difference data HIH<b>1</b>between HDTV and super HDTV or H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>2 (See <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 30</figref>) is assigned to a domain <b>603</b> for the first channel.
0374The selection of the first channel TV signal will now be described. When intercepted by the first receiver <b>23</b> with a small antenna coupled to the first video decoder <b>421</b>, the first channel signal is converted to a standard or widescreen NTSC TV signal as shown in FIG. <b>31</b>. When intercepted by the second receiver <b>33</b> with a medium antenna coupled to the second video decoder <b>422</b>, the signal is converted by summing L<b>1</b> of the first data stream D<sub>1 </sub>assigned into the domain <b>601</b> and M<b>1</b> of the second data stream D<sub>2 </sub>assigned to the domain <b>602</b> to an HDTV signal of the first channel equivalent in program to the NTSC signal.
0375When intercepted by the third receiver <b>43</b> with a large antenna coupled to the third video decoder <b>423</b>, the signal is converted by summing L<b>1</b> of D<sub>1 </sub>assigned to the domain <b>601</b>, M<b>1</b> of D<sub>2 </sub>assigned to the domain <b>602</b>, and H<sub>1 </sub>of D<sub>3 </sub>assigned to the domain <b>603</b> into a super HDTV signal of the first channel equivalent in program to the NTSC signal. The other channel signals can be reproduced in an equal manner.
0376<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 35</figref> shows another data assignment L<b>1</b> of a first channel NTSC signal is assigned to a fistfirst domain <b>601</b>. The domain <b>601</b> which is allocated at the front end of the first data stream D<sub>1</sub>, also contains at front a data S<sub>11 </sub>including a descrambling data and the demodulation data described in the first embodiment. A first channel HDTV signal is transmitted as L<b>1</b> and M<b>1</b>. M<b>1</b>, which is thus a difference data between NTSC and HDTV, is assigned to two domains <b>602</b> and <b>611</b> of D<sub>2</sub>. If L<b>1</b> is a compressed NTSC component of 6 Mbps, M<b>1</b> is two times higher, that is, 12 Mbps. Hence, the total of L<b>1</b> and M<b>1</b> can be demodulated at 18 Mbps with the second receiver <b>33</b> and the second video decoder <b>423</b>. According to current data compression techniques, HDTV compressed signals can be reproduced at about 15 Mbps. This allows the data assignment shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 35</figref> to enable simultaneous reproduction of an NTSC and HDTV first channel signal. However, this assignment allows no second channel HDTV signal to be carried. S<b>21</b> is a descrambling data in the HDTV signal. A first channel super HDTV signal component comprises L<b>1</b>, M<b>1</b>, and H<b>1</b>. The difference data H<b>1</b> is assigned to three domains <b>603</b>, <b>612</b>, and <b>613</b> of D<sub>3</sub>. If the NTSC signal is 6 Mbps, the super HDTV is as high as 36 Mbps. When a compressed rate is increased, super HDTV video data of about 2000 scanning line for reproduction of a cinema size picture for commercial use can be transmitted in an equal manner.
0377<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 36</figref> shows a further data assignment in which H<b>1</b> of a super HDTV signal is assigned to six time domains. If a NTSC compressed signal is 6 Mbps, this assignment can be nine times higher, that is, 54 Mbps of D<sub>3 </sub>data. Accordingly, super HDTV data of higher picture quality can be transmitted.
0378The foregoing data assignment makes the use of one of two, horizontal and vertical, polarization planes of a transmission wave. When both the horizontal and vertical polarization planes are used, the frequency utilization will be doubled. This will be explained below.
0379<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 49</figref> shows a data assignment in which D<sub>V1 </sub>and D<sub>H1 </sub>are a vertical and a horizontal polarization signal of the first data stream respectively, D<sub>V2 </sub>and D<sub>H2 </sub>are a vertical and a horizontal polarization signal of the second data stream respectively, and D<sub>V3 </sub>and D<sub>H3 </sub>are a vertical and a horizontal polarization signal of the third data stream respectively. The vertical polarization signal D<sub>V1 </sub>of the first data stream carries a low frequency band or NTSC TV data and the horizontal polarization signal D<sub>H1 </sub>carries a high frequency band or HDTV data. When the first receiver <b>23</b> is equipped with a vertical polarization signal D<sub>H1 </sub>carries a high frequency band or HDTV data. When the first receiver <b>23</b> is equipped with an antenna for both horizontally and vertically polarized waves, it can reproduce the HDTV signal through summing L<b>1</b> and M<b>1</b>. More specifically, the first receiver <b>23</b> can provide compatibility between NTSC and HDTV with the use of a particular type antenna.
0380<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 50</figref> illustrates a TDMA method in which each data burst <b>721</b> is accompanied at front a sync data <b>731</b> and a card data <b>741</b>. Also, a frame sync data <b>720</b> is provided at the front of a frame. Like channels are assigned to like time slots. For example, a first time slot <b>750</b> carries NTSC, HDTV, and super HDTV data of the first channel simultaneously. The six time slots <b>750</b>, <b>750</b>a, <b>750</b>b, <b>750</b>c, <b>750</b>d, <b>750</b>e, are arranged independent from each other. Hence, each station can offer NTSC, HDTV, and/or super HDTV services independently of the other stations through selecting a particular channel of the time slots. Also, the first receiver <b>23</b> can reproduce an NTSC signal when equipped with a horizontal polarization antenna and both NTSC and HDTV signals when equipped with a compatible polarization antenna. In this respect, the second receiver <b>33</b> can reproduce a super HDTV at lower resolution while the third receiver <b>43</b> can reproduce a full super HDTV signal. According to the third embodiment, a compatible signal transmission system will be constructed. It is understood that the data assignment is not limited to the burst mode TDMA method shown in FIG. <b>50</b> and another method such as time division multiplexing of continuous signals as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 49</figref> will be employed with equal success. Also, a data assignment shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 51</figref> will permit a HDTV signal to be reproduced at high resolution.
0381As set forth above, the compatible digital TV signal transmission system of the third embodiment can offer three, super HDTV, HDTV, and conventional NTSC, TV broadcast services simultaneously. In addition, a video signal intercepted by a commercial station or cinema can be electronized.
0382The modified QAM of the embodiments is now termed as SRQAM and its error rate will be examined.
0383First, the error rate in 16 SRQAM will be calculated. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 99</figref> shows a vector diagram of 16 SRQAM signal points. As apparent from the first quadrant, the 16 signal points of standard 16 QAM including <b>83</b>a, <b>83</b>b<b>85</b>, <b>84</b>a, <b>83</b>a<b>86</b>a are allocated at equal intervals of 2δ.
0384The signal point <b>83</b>a is spaced δ from both the I-axis and the Q-axis of the coordinate. It is now assumed that n is a shift value of the 16 SRQAM. In 16 SRQAM, the signal point <b>83</b>a of 16 QAM is shifted to a signal point <b>83</b> where the distance from each axis is nδ. The shift value n is thus expressed as: <br />0<n<3.
0385The other signal points <b>84</b>a and <b>86</b>a are also shifted to two points <b>84</b> and <b>86</b> respectively.
0386If the error rate of the first data stream is Pe<sub>1</sub>, it is obtained from: <maths id="MATH-US-00001" num="00001"><math overflow="scroll"><mtable><mtr><mtd><mrow><msub><mi>Pe</mi><mrow><mn>1</mn><mo></mo><mi>–16</mi></mrow></msub><mo>=</mo><mi /><mo></mo><mrow><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>4</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><mi>n</mi><mo></mo><mstyle><mtext> </mtext></mstyle><mo></mo><mi>δ</mi></mrow><msqrt><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>σ</mi></mrow></msqrt></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow><mo>+</mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>4</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><mn>3</mn><mo></mo><mi>δ</mi></mrow><msqrt><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>σ</mi></mrow></msqrt></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></mtd></mtr><mtr><mtd><mrow><mo>=</mo><mi /><mo></mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>8</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><mi>n</mi><mo></mo><msqrt><mi>p</mi></msqrt></mrow><msqrt><mrow><mn>9</mn><mo>+</mo><msup><mi>n</mi><mn>2</mn></msup></mrow></msqrt></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></mtd></mtr></mtable></math></maths><img file="USRE40134E_D0001.tif" /><br /> Also, the error rate Pe<sub>2 </sub>of the second data stream is obtained from: <maths id="MATH-US-00002" num="00002"><math overflow="scroll"><mtable><mtr><mtd><mrow><msub><mi>Pe</mi><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>–16</mi></mrow></msub><mo>=</mo><mi /><mo></mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>2</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><mfrac><mrow><mn>3</mn><mo>-</mo><mi>n</mi></mrow><mn>2</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mi>δ</mi></mrow><msqrt><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>σ</mi></mrow></msqrt></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow></mtd></mtr><mtr><mtd><mrow><mo>=</mo><mi /><mo></mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>4</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mrow><mfrac><mrow><mfrac><mrow><mn>3</mn><mo>-</mo><mi>n</mi></mrow><mn>2</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mi>δ</mi></mrow><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><msqrt><mrow><mn>9</mn><mo>+</mo><msup><mi>n</mi><mn>2</mn></msup></mrow></msqrt></mrow></mfrac><mo></mo><msqrt><mi>p</mi></msqrt></mrow><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></mtd></mtr></mtable></math></maths><img file="USRE40134E_D0002.tif" />
0387The error rate of 36 or 32 SRQAM will be calculated. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 100</figref> is a vector diagram of a 36 SRQAM signal in which the distance between any two 36 QAM signal points is 2δ.
0388The signal point <b>83</b>a of 36 QAM is spaced δ from each axis of the coordinate. It is now assumed that n is a shift value of the 16 SRQAM. In 36 SRQAM, the signal point <b>83</b>a is shifted to a signal point <b>83</b> where the distance from each axis is nδ. Similarly, the nine 36 QAM signal points in the first quadrant are shifted to points <b>83</b>, <b>84</b>, <b>85</b>, <b>86</b>, <b>97</b>, <b>98</b>, <b>99</b>, <b>100</b>, <b>101</b> respectively. If a signal point group <b>90</b> comprising the nine signal points is regarded as a single signal point, the error rate Pe<sub>1 </sub>in reproduction of only the first data stream D<sub>1 </sub>with a modified 4 PSK receiver and the error rate Pe<sub>2 </sub>in reproduction of the second data stream D<sub>2 </sub>after discriminating the nine signal points of the group <b>90</b> from each other, are obtained respectively from: <maths id="MATH-US-00003" num="00003"><math overflow="scroll"><mtable><mtr><mtd><mrow><msub><mi>Pe</mi><mrow><mn>1</mn><mo></mo><mi>–32</mi></mrow></msub><mo>=</mo><mi /><mo></mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>6</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><mi>n</mi><mo></mo><mstyle><mtext> </mtext></mstyle><mo></mo><mi>δ</mi></mrow><msqrt><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>σ</mi></mrow></msqrt></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></mtd></mtr><mtr><mtd><mrow><mo>=</mo><mi /><mo></mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>6</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mrow><msqrt><mfrac><mrow><mn>6</mn><mo></mo><mi>p</mi></mrow><mn>5</mn></mfrac></msqrt><mo>×</mo><mfrac><mi>n</mi><msqrt><mrow><msup><mi>n</mi><mn>2</mn></msup><mo>+</mo><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>n</mi></mrow><mo>+</mo><mn>25</mn></mrow></msqrt></mfrac></mrow><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></mtd></mtr></mtable></math></maths><maths id="MATH-US-00003-2" num="00003.2"><math overflow="scroll"><mtable><mtr><mtd><mrow><msub><mi>Pe</mi><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>–32</mi></mrow></msub><mo>=</mo><mi /><mo></mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>2</mn><mn>3</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mrow><mfrac><mrow><mn>5</mn><mo>-</mo><mi>n</mi></mrow><mrow><mn>4</mn><mo></mo><msqrt><mn>22</mn></msqrt></mrow></mfrac><mo></mo><mfrac><mi>δ</mi><mi>p</mi></mfrac></mrow><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></mtd></mtr><mtr><mtd><mrow><mo>=</mo><mi /><mo></mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>2</mn><mn>3</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mrow><msqrt><mfrac><mrow><mn>3</mn><mo></mo><mi>p</mi></mrow><mn>40</mn></mfrac></msqrt><mo>×</mo><mfrac><mrow><mn>5</mn><mo>-</mo><mi>n</mi></mrow><msqrt><mrow><msup><mi>n</mi><mn>2</mn></msup><mo>+</mo><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>n</mi></mrow><mo>+</mo><mn>25</mn></mrow></msqrt></mfrac></mrow><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></mtd></mtr></mtable></math></maths>
0389<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 101</figref> shows the relationship between error rate Pe and C/N rate in transmission in which the curve <b>900</b> represents a conventional or not modified 32 QAM signal. The straight line <b>905</b> represents a signal having 10<sup>−1.5 </sup>of the error rate. The curve <b>901</b>a represents a D<sub>1 </sub>level 32 SRQAM signal of the present invention at the shift rate n of 1.5. As shown, the C/N rate of the 32 SRQAM signal is 5 dB lower at the error rate of 10<sup>−1.5 </sup>than that of the conventional 32 QAM. This means that the present invention allows a D<sub>1 </sub>signal to be reproduced at a given error rate when its C/N rate is relatively low.
0390The curve <b>902</b>a represents a D<sub>2 </sub>level SRQAM signal at n=1.5 which can be reproduced at the error rate of 10<sup>−1.5 </sup>only when its C/N rate is 2.5 dB higher than that of the conventional 32 QAM of the curve <b>900</b>. Also, the curves <b>901</b>b and <b>902</b>b represent D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>SRQAM signals at n=2.0 respectively. The g curvescurve <b>902</b>c represents a D<sub>2 </sub>SRQAM signal at n=2.5. It is apparent that the C/N rate of the SRQAM signal at the error data of 10<sup>−1.5 </sup>is 5 dB, 8 dB, and 10 dB higher at n=1.5, 2.0, and 2.5 respectively in the D<sub>1 </sub>level and 2.5 dB lower in the D<sub>2 </sub>level than that of a common 32 QAM signals.
0391Shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 103</figref> is the C/N rate of the first and second data streams D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2 </sub>of a 32 SRQAM signal which is needed for maintaining a constant error rate against variation of the shift n. As apparent, when the shift n is more than 0.8, there is developed a clear difference between two C/N rates of their respective D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>levels so that the multi-level signal, namely first and second data, transmission can be implemented successfully. In brief, n>0.85 is essential for multi-level data transmission of the 32 SRQAM signal of the present invention.
0392<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 102</figref> shows the relationship between the C/N rate and the error rate for 16 SRQAM signals. The curve <b>900</b> represents a common 16 QAM signal. The curves <b>901</b>a, <b>901</b>b, <b>901</b>c and D<sub>1 </sub>level or first data stream 16 SRQAM signals at n=1.2, 1.5, and 1.8 respectively. The curves <b>902</b>a, <b>902</b>b, <b>902</b>c are D<sub>2 </sub>level or second data stream 16 SRQAM signals at n=1.2, 1.5, and 1.8 respectively.
0393The C/N rate of the first and second data streams D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2 </sub>of a 16 SRQAM signal is shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 104</figref>, which is needed for maintaining a constant error rate against variation of the shift n. As apparent, when the shift n is more than 0.9 (n>0.9), the multi-level data transmission of the 16 SRQAM signal will be executed.
0394One example of propagation of SRQAM signals of the present invention will now be described for use with a digital TV terrestrial broadcast service. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 105</figref> shows the relationship between the signal level and the distance between a transmitter antenna and a receiver antenna in the terrestrial broadcast service. The curve <b>911</b> represents a transmitted signal from the transmitter antenna which is 1250 feet high. It is assumed that the error rate essential for reproduction of an applicable digital TV signal is 10<sup>−1.5</sup>. The hatching area <b>912</b> represents a noise interruption. The point <b>910</b> represents a signal reception limit of a conventional 32 QAM signal at C/N=15 dB where the distance L is 60 miles and a digital HDTV signal can be intercepted at minimum.
0395The C/N rate varies 5 dB under a worst case receiving condition such as bad weather. If a change in the relevant condition, e.g. weather, attenuates the C/N rate, the interception of an HDTV signal will hardly be ensured. Also, geographical conditions largely affect the propagation of signals and a decrease of about 10 dB at least will be unavoidable. Hence, successful signal interception within 60 miles will never be guaranteed and above all, a digital signal will be harder to propagate than an analogue signal. It would be understood that the service area of a conventional digital TV broadcast service is less dependable.
0396In case of the 32 SRQAM signal of the present invention or the 8-VSB shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 68</figref>, a three-level signal transmission system is constituted as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 133 and 137</figref>. This permits a low resolution NTSC signal of MPEG level to be carried on the <b>1</b>-<b>1</b> data stream D<sub>1-1</sub>, a medium resolution TV data of e.g. NTSC system to be carried on the <b>1</b>-<b>2</b> data stream D<sub>1-2</sub>, and a high frequency component of HDTV data to be carried on the second data stream D<sub>2</sub>. Accordingly, the service area of the <b>1</b>-<b>2</b> data stream of the SRQAM signal is increased to a 70 mile point <b>910</b>a while that of the second data stream remains within a 55 mile point <b>910</b>b, as shown in FIG. <b>105</b>. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 106</figref> illustrates a computer simulation result of the service area of the 32 SRQAM signal of the present invention, which is similar to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 53</figref> but explains it in more detail. As shown, the regions <b>708</b>, <b>703</b>c, <b>703</b>a, <b>703</b>b, and <b>712</b> represent a conventional 32 QAM receivable area, a <b>1</b>-<b>1</b> data level D<sub>1-1 </sub>receivable area, a <b>1</b>-<b>2</b> data level D<sub>1-2 </sub>receivable area, a second data level D<sub>2 </sub>receivable area, and a service area of a neighbor analogue TV station respectively. The conventional 32 QAM signal data used in this drawing is based on a conventionally disclosed one.
0397For common 32 QAM signal, the 60-mile-radius service area can be established theoretically. The signal level will however be attenuated by geographical or weather conditions and particularly, considerably declined at near the limit of the service area.
0398If the low frequency band TV component of MPEG1 grade is carried on the <b>1</b>-<b>1</b> level D<sub>1-1 </sub>data and the medium frequency band TV component of NTSC grade on the <b>1</b>-<b>2</b> level D<sub>1-2 </sub>data and high frequency band TV component of HDTV on the second level D<sub>2 </sub>data, the service area of the 32 SRQAM signal of the present invention is increased by 10 miles in radius for reception of an EDTV signal of medium resolution grade and 18 miles for reception of an LDTV signal of low resolution grade although decreased by 5 miles for reception of an HDTV signal of high resolution grade, as shown in FIG. <b>106</b>. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 107</figref> shows a service area in case of a shift factor n or s=1.8. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 135</figref> shows the service area of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 107</figref> in terms of area.
0399More particularly, the medium resolution component of a digital TV broadcast signal of the SRQAM mode of the preset invention can successfully be intercepted in an unfavorable service region or shadow area where a conventional medium frequency band TV signal is hardly propagated and attenuated due to obstacles. Within at least the predetermined service area, the NTSC TV signal of the SRQAM mode can be intercepted by any traditional TV receiver. As the shadow or signal attenuating area developed by building structures and other obstacles or by interference of a neighbor analogue TV signal or produced in a low land is decreased to a minimum, TV viewers or subscribers will be increased in number.
0400Also, the HDTV service can be appreciated by only a few viewers who afford to have a set of high cost HDTV receiver and display, according to the conventional system. The system of the present invention allows a traditional NTSC, PAL, or SECAM receiver to intercept a medium resolution component of the digital HDTV signal with the use of an additional digital tuner. A majority of TV viewers can hence enjoy the service at less cost and will be increased in number. This will encourage the TV broadcast business and create an extra social benefit.
0401Furthermore, the signal receivable area for medium resolution or NTSC TV service according to the present invention is increased about 36% at n=2.5, as compared with the conventional system,. As the service area thus the number of TV viewers is increased, the TV broadcast business enjoys an increasing profit. This reduces a risk in the development of a new digital TV business which will thus be encouraged to put into practice.
0402<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 107</figref> shows the service area of a 32 SRQAM signal of the present invention in which the same effect will be ensured at n=1.8. Two service areas <b>703</b>a and <b>703</b>b, of D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>signals respectively can be determined in extension for optimum signal propagation by varying the shift n considering a profile of HDTV and NTSC receiver distribution or geographical features. Accordingly, TV viewers will satisfy the service and a supplier station will enjoy a maximum of viewers.
0403This advantage is given when: <br />n>1.0 <br /> Hence, if the 32 SRQAM signal is selected, the shift n is determined by: <br />1<n<5 <br /> Also, if the 16 SRQAM signal is employed, n is determined by: <br />1<n<3
0404In the SRQAM mode signal terrestrial broadcast service in which the first and second data levels are created by shifting corresponding signal points as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 99 and 100</figref>, the advantage of the present invention will be given when the shift n in a 16, 32, or 64 SRQAM signal is more than 1.0.
0405In the above embodiments, the low and high frequency band components of a video signal are transmitted as the first and second data streams. However, the transmitted signal may be an audio signal. In this case, low frequency or low resolution components of an audio signal may be transmitted as the first data stream, and high frequency or high resolution components of the audio signal may be transmitted as the second data stream. Accordingly, it is possible to receive high C/N portion in high sound quality, and low C/N portion in low sound quality. This can be utilized in PCM broadcast, radio, portable telephone and the like. In this case, the broadcasting area or communication distance can be expanded as compared with the conventional systems.
0406Furthermore, the third embodiment can incorporate a time division multiplexing (TDM) system as shown in FIG. <b>133</b>. Utilization of the TDM makes it possible to increase the number of subchannels. An ECC encoder <b>743</b>a and ECC encoder <b>743</b>b, provided in two subchannels, differentiate ECC code gains so as to make a difference between thresholds of these two subchannels, whereby an increase in the number of channels of the multi-level signal transmission can be realized. In this case, it is also possible to provide the ECC encoder, such as two Trellis encoders <b>743</b>a and <b>743</b>b for VSB-ASK signals of 4 VSB, 8 VSB, 16 VSB as shown in FIG. <b>137</b> and differentiate their code gains. The explanation of this block diagram is substantially identical to that of later described block diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 131</figref> which shows the sixth embodiment of the present invention and, therefore, will not be described here.
0407<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 131</figref> is a block diagram of the magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus, and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 137</figref> is a block diagram of the transmission apparatus.
0408The up converter of the transmitter and the down converter of the receiver of the transmission apparatus can be substituted for the magnetic head recording signal amplifier circuit and the magnetic head reproducing signal amplifier circuit of the magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus, respectively, and there respective components are therefore identically constructed. The configuration and operation of the modulator and demodulator of the magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus are therefore also identical to those of the transmission apparatus. Similarly, the recording/reproducing/transmission system shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 84</figref> is identical in construction to the transmission system shown in FIG. <b>156</b>. To further simplify the system, the configuration shown in the block diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 157</figref> can be used, or for even greater simplification the block diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 158</figref> can be used.
0409In a simulation of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 106</figref>, there is provided 5 dB difference of a coding gain between <b>1</b>-<b>1</b> subchannel D<sub>1-1 </sub>and <b>1</b>-<b>2</b> subchannel D<sub>1-2</sub>.
0410An SRQAM is the system applying a C-CDM (Constellation-Code Division Multiplex) of the present invention to a rectangle-QAM. A C-CDM, which is a multiplexing method independent of TDM or FDM, can obtain subchannels by dividing a constellation-code corresponding to a code. An increase of the number of codes will bring an expansion of transmission capacity, which is not attained by TDM or FDM alone, while maintaining almost perfect compatibility with conventional communication apparatus. Thus C-CDM can bring excellent effects.
0411Although above embodiment combines the C-CDM and the TDM, it is also possible to combine the C-CDM with the FDM (Frequency Division Multiplex) to obtain similar modulation effect of threshold values. Such a system can be used for a TV broadcasting, and FIGS. <b>108</b>(a)-<b>108</b>(e) show shows a frequency distribution of a TV signal. A spectrum <b>725</b> represents a frequency distribution of a conventional analogue, e.g. NTSC, broadcasting signal. The largest signal is a video carrier <b>722</b>. A color carrier <b>723</b> and a sound carrier <b>724</b> are not so large. There is known a method of using an FDM for dividing a digital broadcasting signal into two frequencies. In this case, a carrier is divided into a first carrier <b>726</b> and a second carrier <b>727</b> to transmit a first <b>720</b> and a second signal <b>721</b> respectively. Interference can be lowered by placing first and second carriers <b>726</b> and <b>727</b> sufficiently far from the video carrier <b>722</b>. The first signal <b>720</b> serves to transmit a low resolution TV signal at a large output level, while the second signal <b>721</b> serves to transmit a high resolution TV signal at a small output level. Consequently, the multi-level signal transmission making use of an FDM can be realized without being bothered by obstruction.
0412<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 134</figref> shows an example of a conventional method using a 32 QAM system. As the subchannel A has a larger output than the subchannel B, a threshold value for the subchannel A, i.e. a threshold <b>1</b>, can be set small 4˜5 dB than a threshold value for the subchannel B, i.e. a threshold <b>2</b>. Accordingly, a two-level broadcasting having 4˜5 dB threshold difference can be realized. In this case, however, a large reduction of signal reception amount will occur if the receiving signal level decreases below the threshold <b>2</b>. Because the second signal <b>721</b>a, having a large information amount as shaded in the drawing, cannot be received in such a case and only the first signal <b>720</b>a, having a small information amount, is received. Consequently, a pecturepicture quality brought by the second level will be extremely worse.
0413However, the present invention resolves this problem. According to the present invention, the first signal <b>720</b> is given by 32 SRQAM mode which is obtained through C-CDM modulation so that the subchannel A is divided into two subchannels <b>1</b> of A and <b>2</b> of A. The newly added subchannel <b>1</b> of A, having a lowest threshold value, carries a low resolution component. The second signal <b>721</b> is also given by 32 SRQAM mode, and a threshold value for the subchannel <b>1</b> of B is equalized with the threshold <b>2</b>.
0414With this arrangement, the region in which a transmitted signal is not received when the signal level decreases below the threshold <b>2</b> is reduced to a shaded portion of the second signal <b>721</b>a in FIG. <b>108</b>. As the subchannel <b>1</b> of B and the subchannel A are both receivable, the transmission amount is not so much reduced in total. Accordingly, a better picture quality is reproduced even in the second level at the signal level of the threshold <b>2</b>.
0415By transmitting a normal resolution component in one subchannel, it becomes possible to increase the number of multiple level and expand a low resolution service area. This low-threshold subchannel is utilized for transmitting important information such as sound information, sync information, headers of respective data, because these information carried on this low-threshold subchannel can be surely received. Thus stable reception is feasible. If a subchannel is newly added in the second signal <b>721</b> in the same manner, the number of levels of multi-level transmission can be increased in the service area. In the case where an HDTV signal has 1050 scanning lines, ana new service area equivalent to 775 lines can be provided in addition to 525 lines.
0416Accordingly, the combination of the FDM and the C-CDM realizes an increase of service area. Although above embodiment divides a subchannel into two, it is needless to say it is also possible to divide it into three or more parts.
0417Next, a method of avoiding obstruction by combining the TDM and the C-CDM will be explained. As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 109</figref>, an analogue TV signal includes a horizontal retrace line portion <b>732</b> and a video signal portion <b>731</b>. This method utilizes a low signal level of the horizontal retrace line portion <b>732</b> and non-display of obstruction on a picture plane during this period. By synchronizing a digital TV signal with an analogue TV signal, horizontal retrace line sync slots <b>733</b> and <b>733</b>a of the horizontal retrace line portion <b>732</b> can be used for transmission of an important signal, e.g. a sync signal or numerous data at a high output level. Thus, it becomes possible to increase the data amount or output level without increasing obstruction. A similar effect will be expected even if vertical retrace line sync slots <b>737</b> and <b>737</b>a are provided synchronously with vertical retrace line portions <b>735</b> and <b>735</b>a.
0418<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 110</figref> shows a principle of the C-CDM. Furthermore, <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 111</figref> shows a code assignment of the C-CDM equivalent to an expanded 16 QAM. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 112</figref> shows a code assignment of the C-CDM equivalent to an expanded 32 QAM. As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 110 and 111</figref>, a 256 QAM signal is divided into four, <b>740</b>a, <b>740</b>b, <b>740</b>c, and <b>740</b>d, levels which have 4, 16, 64, and 256 segments, respectively. A signal code word <b>742</b>d of 256 QAM on the fourth level <b>740</b>d is “11111111” of 8 bits. This is split into four code words <b>741</b>a, <b>741</b>b, <b>741</b>c, and <b>741</b>d of 2-bits—i.e. “11”, “11”, “11”, “11”, which are then allocated on signal point regions <b>742</b>a, <b>742</b>b, <b>742</b>c, and <b>742</b>d of first, second, third, and fourth levels <b>740</b>a, <b>740</b>b, <b>740</b>c, and <b>740</b>d, respectively. As a result, subchannels <b>1</b>, <b>2</b>, <b>3</b>, and <b>4</b> of 2 bits are created. This is termed C-CDM (Constellation-Code Division Multiplex). <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 111</figref> shows a detailed code assignment of the C-CDM equivalent to expanded 16 QAM, and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 112</figref> shows a detailed code assignment of the C-CDM equivalent to expanded 32 QAM. As the C-CDM is an independent multiplexing method, it can be combined with the conventional FDM (Frequency Division Multiplex) or TDM (Time Division Multiplex) to further increase the number of subchannels. In this manner, the C-CDM method realizes a novel multiplexing system. Although the C-CDM is explained by using rectangular QAM, other modulation system having signal points, e.g. QAM, PSK, ASK, and even FSK if frequency regions are regarded as signal points, can be also used for this multiplexing in the same manner.
0419For example, the error rate of the subchannel <b>1</b> of 8PS-APSK, explained in the embodiment <b>1</b> with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 139</figref>, will be expressed as follows: <br /><maths id="MATH-US-00004" num="00004"><math overflow="scroll"><mrow><mrow><mrow><mo>[</mo><mrow><mo>[</mo><mo> </mo></mrow><mo> </mo></mrow><mo></mo><msub><mi>Pe</mi><mrow><mn>1</mn><mo>-</mo><mn>8</mn></mrow></msub></mrow><mo>=</mo><mrow><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>4</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><mi>δ</mi><mo></mo><msqrt><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mstyle><mtext> </mtext></mstyle><mo></mo><mi>α</mi></mrow></msqrt></mrow><msqrt><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mstyle><mtext> </mtext></mstyle><mo></mo><mi>α</mi></mrow></msqrt></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow><mo>+</mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>4</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><mrow><mo>(</mo><mrow><msub><mi>S</mi><mn>1</mn></msub><mo>+</mo><mn>1</mn></mrow><mo>)</mo></mrow><mo></mo><mi>δ</mi></mrow><msqrt><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mstyle><mtext> </mtext></mstyle><mo></mo><mi>σ</mi></mrow></msqrt></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow><mo></mo><mstyle><mtext> </mtext></mstyle><mo></mo><mrow><mo> </mo><mrow><mrow><mrow><mo> </mo><mo>]</mo></mrow><mo></mo><mrow><mo> </mo><mo>]</mo></mrow><mo></mo><mstyle><mtext></mtext></mstyle><mo></mo><msub><mi>Pe</mi><mrow><mn>1</mn><mo></mo><mrow><mi>–</mi><mo></mo><mn>8</mn></mrow></mrow></msub></mrow><mo>=</mo><mrow><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>4</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mi>δ</mi><msqrt><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>α</mi></mrow></msqrt></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow><mo>+</mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>4</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><mrow><mo>(</mo><mrow><msub><mi>S</mi><mn>1</mn></msub><mo>+</mo><mn>1</mn></mrow><mo>)</mo></mrow><mo></mo><mi>δ</mi></mrow><msqrt><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>σ</mi></mrow></msqrt></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></math></maths><img file="USRE40134E_D0003.tif" />
0420The error rate of the subchannel <b>2</b> is expressed as follows: <maths id="MATH-US-00005" num="00005"><math overflow="scroll"><mrow><msub><mi>Pe</mi><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>–8</mi></mrow></msub><mo>=</mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>2</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><msub><mi>S</mi><mn>1</mn></msub><mo></mo><mi>δ</mi></mrow><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>σ</mi></mrow></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow></math></maths><img file="USRE40134E_D0004.tif" />
0421Furthermore, the error rate of the subchannel <b>1</b> of 16-PS-APSK (PS type), explained with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 142</figref>, will be expressed as followfollows: <maths id="MATH-US-00006" num="00006"><math overflow="scroll"><mrow><msub><mi>Pe</mi><mrow><mn>1</mn><mo></mo><mi>–16</mi></mrow></msub><mo>=</mo><mrow><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>8</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mi>δ</mi><msqrt><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>σ</mi></mrow></msqrt></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow><mo>+</mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>8</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><mrow><mo>(</mo><mrow><msub><mi>S</mi><mn>2</mn></msub><mo>+</mo><mn>1</mn></mrow><mo>)</mo></mrow><mo></mo><mi>δ</mi></mrow><msqrt><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>σ</mi></mrow></msqrt></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow><mo>+</mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>8</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><mrow><mo>(</mo><mrow><msub><mi>S</mi><mn>1</mn></msub><mo>+</mo><mn>1</mn></mrow><mo>)</mo></mrow><mo></mo><mi>δ</mi></mrow><msqrt><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>σ</mi></mrow></msqrt></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow><mo>+</mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>8</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><mrow><mo>(</mo><mrow><msub><mi>S</mi><mn>1</mn></msub><mo>+</mo><msub><mi>S</mi><mn>2</mn></msub><mo>+</mo><mn>1</mn></mrow><mo>)</mo></mrow><mo></mo><mi>δ</mi></mrow><msqrt><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>σ</mi></mrow></msqrt></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></math></maths><img file="USRE40134E_D0005.tif" />
0422The error rate of the subchannel <b>2</b> is expressed as follows: <maths id="MATH-US-00007" num="00007"><math overflow="scroll"><mrow><msub><mi>Pe</mi><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>–16</mi></mrow></msub><mo>=</mo><mrow><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>4</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><msub><mi>S</mi><mn>1</mn></msub><mo></mo><mi>δ</mi></mrow><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>σ</mi></mrow></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow><mo>+</mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>8</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><mrow><mo>(</mo><mrow><msub><mi>S</mi><mn>1</mn></msub><mo>-</mo><msub><mi>S</mi><mn>2</mn></msub></mrow><mo>)</mo></mrow><mo></mo><mi>δ</mi></mrow><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>σ</mi></mrow></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow><mo>+</mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>8</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><mrow><mo>(</mo><mrow><msub><mi>S</mi><mn>1</mn></msub><mo>+</mo><msub><mi>S</mi><mn>2</mn></msub></mrow><mo>)</mo></mrow><mo></mo><mi>δ</mi></mrow><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>σ</mi></mrow></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></math></maths><img file="USRE40134E_D0006.tif" />
0423The error rate of the subchannel <b>3</b> is expressed as follows: <maths id="MATH-US-00008" num="00008"><math overflow="scroll"><mrow><msub><mi>Pe</mi><mrow><mn>3</mn><mo></mo><mi>–10</mi></mrow></msub><mo>=</mo><mrow><mfrac><mn>1</mn><mn>2</mn></mfrac><mo></mo><mrow><mi>erfc</mi><mo></mo><mrow><mo>(</mo><mfrac><mrow><msub><mi>S</mi><mn>2</mn></msub><mo></mo><mi>δ</mi></mrow><mrow><mn>2</mn><mo></mo><mi>σ</mi></mrow></mfrac><mo>)</mo></mrow></mrow></mrow></mrow></math></maths><img file="USRE40134E_D0007.tif" />
EMBODIMENT 4
0424A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described referring to the relevant drawings.
0425<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 37</figref> illustrates the entire arrangement of a signal transmission system of the fourth embodiment, which is arranged for terrestrial service and similar in both construction and action to that of the third embodiment shown in FIG. <b>29</b>. The difference is that the transmitter antenna <b>6</b> is replaced by a terrestrial antenna <b>6</b>a and the receiver antennas <b>22</b>, <b>23</b>, and <b>24</b><b>32</b>, and <b>42</b>are also replaced by three terrestrial antennas <b>22</b>a, <b>23</b>a, and <b>24</b>a<b>32</b>a and <b>42</b>a. The action of the system is identical to that of the third embodiment and will not be explained in more detail. The terrestrial broadcast service unlike a satellite service depends much on the distance between the transmitter antenna <b>6</b>a to the receiver antennas <b>22</b>a, <b>32</b>a, and <b>42</b>a. If a receiver is located far from the transmitter, the level of a received signal is low. Particularly, a common multi-level QAM signal can hardly be demodulated by the receiver which thus reproduces no TV program.
0426The signal transmission system of the present invention allows the first receiver <b>23</b> equipped with the antenna <b>22</b>a, which is located at a far distance as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 37</figref>, to intercept a modified 16 or 64 QAM signal and demodulate at 4 PSK mode the first data stream or D<sub>1 </sub>component of the received signal to an NTSC video signal so that a TV program picture of medium resolution can be displayed even if the level of the received signal is relatively low.
0427Also, the second receiver <b>33</b> with the antenna <b>32</b>a is located at a medium distance from the antenna <b>6</b>a and can thus intercept and demodulate both first and second data streams or D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>components of the modified 16 or 64 QAM signal to an HDTV video signal which in turn produces an HDTV program picture.
0428The third receiver <b>43</b> with the antenna <b>42</b>a is located at a near distance and can intercept and demodulate the first, second, and third data streams or D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>, and D<sub>3 </sub>components of the modified 16 or 64 QAM signal to a super HDTV video signal which in turn produces a super HDTV picture in quality to a common movie picture.
0429The assignment of frequencies is determined by the same manner as of the time division multiplexing shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 34</figref>, <b>35</b>, and <b>36</b>. Like <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 34</figref>, when the frequencies are assigned to first to sixth channels, L<b>1</b> of the D<sub>1 </sub>component carries an NTSC data of the first channel, M<b>1</b> of the D<sub>2 </sub>component carries an HDTV difference data of the first channel, and H<b>1</b> of the D<sub>3 </sub>component carries a super HDTV difference data of the first channel. Accordingly, NTSC, HDTV, and super HDTV data all can be carried on the same channel. If D<sub>2 </sub>and D<sub>3 </sub>of the other channels are utilized as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 35 and 36</figref>, more data of HDTV and super HDTV respectively can be transmitted for higher resolution display.
0430As understood, the system allows three different but compatible digital TV signals to be carried on a single channel or using D<sub>2 </sub>and D<sub>3 </sub>regions of other channels. Also, the medium resolution TV picture data of each channel can be intercepted in a wider service area according to the present invention.
0431A variety of terrestrial digital TV broadcast systems employing a 16 QAM HDTV signal of 6 MHz bandwidth have been proposed. Those are however not compatible with the existing NTSC system and thus, have to be associated with a simulcast technique for transmitting NTSC signals of the same program on another channel. Also, such a common 16 QAM signal limits a service area. The terrestrial service system of the present invention allows a receiver located at a relatively far distance to intercept successfully a medium resolution TV signal with no use of an additional device nor an extra channel.
0432FIG. <b>52</b>. shows an interference region of the service area <b>702</b> of a conventional terrestrial digital HDTV broadcast station <b>701</b>. As shown, the service area <b>702</b> of the conventional HDTV station <b>701</b> intersects with the service area <b>712</b> of a neighboring analogue TV station <b>711</b>. At the intersecting region <b>713</b>, an HDTV signal is attenuated by signal interference from the analogue TV station <b>711</b> and will thus be intercepted with less consistency.
0433<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 53</figref> shows an interference region associated with the multi-level signal transmission system of the present invention. The system is low in the energy utilization as compared with a conventional system and its service area <b>703</b> for HDTV signal propagation is smaller than the area <b>702</b> of the conventional system. On the contrary, the service area <b>704</b> for digital NTSC or medium resolution TV signal propagation is larger than the conventional area <b>702</b>. The level of signal interference from a digital TV station <b>701</b> of the system to a neighboring analogue TV station <b>711</b> is equivalent to that from a conventional digital TV station, such as shown in FIG. <b>52</b>.
0434In the service area of the digital TV station <b>701</b>, there are three interference regions developed by signal interference from the analogue TV station <b>711</b>. Both HDTV and NTSC signals can hardly be intercepted in the first region <b>705</b>. Although fairly interfered, an NTSC signal may be intercepted at an equal level in the second region <b>706</b> denoted by the left down hatching. The NTSC signal is carried on the first data stream which can be reproduced at a relatively low C/N rate and will thus be minimumminimally affected when the C/N rate is declined by signal interference from the analogue TV station <b>711</b>.
0435At the third region <b>707</b> denoted by the right down hatching, an HDTV signal can also be intercepted when signal interference is absent while the NTSC signal can constantly be intercepted at a low level.
0436Accordingly, the overall signal receivable area of the system will be increased although the service area of HDTV signals becomes a little bit smaller than that of the conventional system. Also, at the signal attenuating regions produced by interference from a neighboring analogue TV station, NTSC level signals of an HDTV program can successfully be intercepted as compared with the conventional system where no HDTV program is viewed in the same area. The system of the present invention much reduces the size of signal attenuating area and when increases the energy of signal transmission at a transmitter or transponder station, can extend the HDTV signal service area to an equal size to the conventional system. Also, NTSC level signals of a TV program can be intercepted more or less in a far distance area where no service is given by the conventional system or a signal interference area caused by an adjacent analogue TV station.
0437Although the embodiment employs a two-level signal transmission method, a three-level method such as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 78</figref> will be used with equal success. If an HDTV signal is divided into three picture levels-HDTV, NTC, and low resolution NTSC, the service area shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 53</figref> will be increased from two levels to three levels where the signal propagation is extended radially and outwardly. Also, low resolution NTSC signals can be received at an acceptable level at the first signal interference region <b>705</b> where NTSC signals are hardly be intercepted in the two-level system. As understood, the signal interference is also involved from a digital TV station to an analogue TV station.
0438The description will now be continued, provided that no digital TV station should cause a signal interference to any neighboring analogue TV station. According to a novel system under consideration in U.S.A., no-use channels of the existing service channels are utilized for HDTV and thus, digital signals must not interfere with analogue signals. For the purpose, the transmitting level of a digital signal has to be decreased lower than that shown in FIG. <b>53</b>. If the digital signal is of conventional 16 QAM or 4 PSK mode, its HDTV service area <b>708</b> becomes decreased as the signal interference region <b>713</b> is fairly large as shown in FIG. <b>54</b>. This results in a less number of viewers and sponsors, whereby such a digital system will have much difficulty in operating as a profitable business.
0439<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 55</figref> shows a similar result according to the system of the present invention. As apparent, the HDTV signal receivable area <b>703</b> is a little bit smaller than the equal area <b>708</b> of the conventional system. However, the lower resolution or NTSC TV signal receivable area <b>704</b> will be increased as compared with the conventional system. The hatching area represents a region where the NTSC level signal of a program can be received while HDTV signal of the semesame is hardly intercepted. At the first interference region <b>705</b>, both HDTV and NTSC signals cannot be intercepted due to signal interference from an analogue station <b>711</b>.
0440When the level of signals is equal, the multi-level transmission system of the present invention provides a smaller HDTV service area and a greater NTSC service area for interception of an HDTV program at an NTSC signal level. Accordingly, the overall service area of each station is increased and more viewers can enjoy its TV broadcasting service. Furthermore, HDTV/NTSC compatible TV business can be operated with economical advantages and consistency. It is also intended that the level of a transmitting signal is increased when the control on averting signal interference to neighboring analogue TV stations is lessened corresponding to a sharp increase in the number of home-use digital receivers. Hence, the service area of HDTV signals will be increased and in this respect, the two different regions for interception of HDTV/NTSC and NTSC digital TV signal levels respectively, shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 55</figref>, can be adjusted in proportion by varying the signal point distance in the first and/or second data stream. As the first data stream carries information about the signal point distance, a multi-level signal can be received with more certainty.
0441<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 56</figref> illustrates signal interference between two digital TV stations in which a neighboring TV station <b>701</b>a also provides a digital TV broadcast service, as compared with an analogue station in FIG. <b>52</b>. Since the level of a transmitting signal becomes high, the HDTV service or high resolution TV signal receivable area <b>703</b>inis increased to an extension equal to the service area <b>702</b> of an analogue TV system.
0442At the intersecting region <b>714</b> between two service areas of their respective stations, the received signal can be reproduced not to an HDTV level picture using a common directional antenna due to signal interference but to an NTSC level picture with a particular directional antenna directed towards a desired TV station. If a highly directional antenna is used, the received signal from a target station will be reproduced as an HDTV picture. The low resolution signal receivable area <b>704</b> is increased larger than the analogue TV system service area <b>702</b> and a pair of intersecting regions <b>715</b> and <b>716</b> developed by the two low resolution signal receivable areas <b>704</b> and <b>704</b>a of their respective digital TV stations <b>701</b> and <b>701</b>a permit the received signal from an antenna directed to one of the two stations to be reproduced as an NTSC level picture.
0443The HDTV service area of the multi-level signal transmission system of the present invention itself will be much increased when applicable signal restriction rules are withdrawn in a coming digital TV broadcast service maturity time.
0444At the time, the system of the present invention also provides as a wide HDTV signal receivable area as of the conventional system and particularly, allows its transmitting signal to be reproduced at an NTSC level in a further distance or intersecting areas where TV signals of the conventional system are hardly intercepted. Accordingly, signal attenuating or shadow regions in the service area will be minimized.
EMBODIMENT 5
0445A fifth embodiment of the present invention resides in amplitude modulation or ASK procedure. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 57</figref> illustrates the assignment of signal points of a 4-level ASK signal, such as VSB signal, according to the fifth embodiment, in which four signal points are denoted by <b>721</b>, <b>722</b>, <b>723</b>, and <b>724</b>. FIG. <b>68</b>(a) shows the constellation of 8-level VSB signal. The four-level transmission permits a 2-bit data to be transmitted in every cycle period where as the eight-level transmission permits a 4-bit data. It is assumed that the four signal points <b>721</b>, <b>722</b>, <b>723</b>, and <b>724</b> in the case of 4 VSB represent two-bit patterns 00, 01, 10, and 11 respectively.
0446In <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 58</figref>, the constellation of 4-level ASK, such as 4-level VSB, is shown. For ease of four-level signal transmission of the embodiment, the two signal points <b>721</b> and <b>722</b> are designated as a first signal point group <b>725</b> and the other two signal points <b>723</b> and <b>724</b> are designated as a second signal point group <b>726</b>. The distance between the two signal point groups <b>725</b> and <b>726</b> is then determined wider than that between any two adjacent signal points. More specifically, the distance L<sub>0 </sub>between the two signals <b>722</b> and <b>723</b> is arranged wider than the distance L between the two adjacent points <b>721</b> and <b>722</b> or <b>723</b> and <b>724</b>.
0447This is expressed as: <br />L<sub>0</sub>>L
0448Hence, the multi-level signal transmission system of the embodiment is based on L<sub>0</sub>>L. The embodiment is however not limited to L<sub>0</sub>>L, and L<sub>0</sub>=L will be employed temporarily or permanently depending on the requirements of design, condition, and setting. In the case of VSB, the constellation shown in FIGS. <b>68</b>(a) and (b) are taken.
0449The two signal point groupgroups are assigned one-bit patterns of the first data stream D<sub>1</sub>, as shown in FIG. <b>59</b>(a). More particularly, a bit <b>0</b> of binary system is assigned to the first signal point group <b>725</b> and another bit <b>1</b> to the second signal point group <b>726</b>. Then, a one-bit pattern of the second data stream D<sub>2 </sub>is assigned to each signal point. For example, the two signal points <b>721</b> and <b>723</b> are assigned D<sub>2</sub>=O and the other two signal points <b>722</b> and <b>724</b> are assigned D<sub>2</sub>=1.
0450The multi-level signal transmission of the present invention can be implemented in an ASK mode using the foregoing signal point assignment. The system of the present invention works in the same manner as of a conventional equal signal point distance technique when the signal to noise ratio or C/N rate is high. If the C/N rate becomes low and no data can be reproduced by the conventional technique, the present system ensures reproduction of the first data stream D<sub>1 </sub>but not the second data stream D<sub>2</sub>. In more detail, the state at a low C/N is shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 60</figref> illustrating the constellation of ASK of 4 VSB. The signal points transmitted are displaced by a Gaussian distrigutiondistribution to ranges <b>721</b>a, <b>722</b>a, <b>723</b>a, and <b>724</b>a respectively at the receiver side due to noise and transmission distortion. Therefore, the distinction between the two signals <b>721</b> and <b>722</b> in the case of slice level <b>2</b> or between <b>723</b> and <b>724</b> in the case of slice level <b>4</b> will hardly be executed. In other words, the error rate in the second data stream D<sub>2 </sub>will be increased. As apparent from <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 60</figref>, the two signal points <b>721</b> and <b>722</b> are easily distinguished from the other two signal points <b>723</b> and <b>724</b>. The distinction between the two signal point groups <b>725</b> and <b>726</b> can thus be carried out with ease. As the result, the first data stream D<sub>1 </sub>will be reproduced at a low error rate.
0451Accordingly, the two different level data D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>can be transmitted simultaneously. More particularly, both the first and second data streams D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>of a given signal transmitted through the multi-level transmission system can be reproduced at the area where the C/N rate is high and the first data stream D<sub>1 </sub>only can be reproduced in the area where the C/N rate is low.
0452<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 61</figref> is a block diagram of a transmitter <b>741</b> in which an input unit <b>742</b> comprises a first data stream input <b>743</b> and a second data stream input <b>744</b>. A carrier wave from a carrier generator <b>64</b> is amplitude modulated by a multiplier <b>746</b> using an input signal fed through a processor <b>745</b> from the input unit <b>743</b><b>742</b>to provide the 4-level or 8-level ASK signal, as shown in FIG. <b>62</b>(a). The modulated signal, i.e., the 4-level or 8-level ASK signal is then band limited by a band pass filter <b>747</b> into a vestigial side band having some residual side band of the carrier, as shown in FIG. <b>62</b>(b), i.e., to an ASK signal of e.g. VSB mode which is then delivered from an output unit <b>748</b>.
0453The waveform of the ASK signal after filtering will now be examined. FIG. <b>62</b>(a) shows a frequency spectrum of the ASK modulated signal in which two sidebands are provided on both sides of the carrier frequency band. One of the two sidebands is eliminated by the filter <b>474</b> to produce a signal <b>749</b> which contains a carrier component as shown in FIG. <b>62</b>(b). The signal <b>749</b> is a VSB signal and if the modulation frequency band is f<sub>0</sub>, will be transmitted in a frequency band of about f<sub>0</sub>/2. Hence, the frequency utilization becomes high. Using VSB mode transmission, the ASK signal of two bit per symbol shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 60</figref> can thus carry in the same frequency band an amount of data equal to that of 16 QAM mode at four bits per symbol for 4 VSB, and 32 QAM mode at five bits per symbol for 8 VSB.
0454<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 63</figref> is a block diagram of a receiver <b>751</b> in which an input signal intercepted by a terrestrial antenna <b>32</b>a is transferred through an input unit <b>752</b> to a mixer <b>753</b> where it is mixed with a signal from a variable oscillator <b>754</b> controlled by channel selection to a lower medium frequency signal. The signal from the mixer <b>753</b> is then detected by a detector <b>755</b> and filtered by an LPF <b>756</b> to a baseband signal which is transferred to a discriminating/demodulator circuit <b>757</b> which has 4-level slicer in the case of 4 VSB, and 8-level slicer in the case of 8 VSB. The discrimination/demodulator circuit <b>757</b> reproduces two, first D<sub>1 </sub>and second D<sub>2</sub>, data streams from the baseband signal and transmits them further through first and second data stream output <b>758</b> and <b>759</b> respectively.
0455The transmission of a TV signal using such a transmitter and a receiver will be explained. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 64</figref> is a block diagram of a video signal transmitter <b>774</b> in which a high resolution TV signal, e.g. an HDTV signal, is fed through an input unit <b>403</b> to a divider circuit <b>404</b> of a first video encoder <b>401</b> where it is divided into four high/low frequency TV signal components denoted by e.g. H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, .H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>. This action is identical to that of the third embodiment previously described referring to FIG. <b>30</b> and will not be explained in more detail. The four separate TV signals are encoded respectively by a compressor <b>405</b> using a known DPCMDCT variable length code encoding technique which is commonly used e.g. in MPEG. Meanwhile, the motion compensation of the signal is carried out at the input unit <b>403</b>. The compressed signals are summed by a summer <b>771</b> into two, first and second, data streams D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2</sub>. The low frequency video signal component or H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>signal is contained in the first data stream D<sub>1</sub>. The two data stream signals D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>are then transferred to first and second data stream inputs <b>743</b> and <b>744</b> of a transmitter unit <b>741</b> where they are amplitude modulated and summed into an ASK signal of e.g. VSB mode which is propagated from a terrestrial antenna for broadcast service.
0456<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 65</figref> is a block diagram of a TV receiver for such a digital TV broadcast system. A 4-VSB or 8-VSB digital TV signal intercepted by a terrestrial antenna <b>32</b>a is fed to an input <b>752</b> of a receiver <b>781</b>. The signal is then transferred to a VSB detection/demodulation circuit <b>760</b> where a desired channel signal is selected and demodulated to two, first and second, data streams D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>which are then fed to first and second data stream outputs <b>758</b> and <b>759</b> respectively. The operation in the receiver unit <b>751</b> is similar to that described previously and will not be explained in more detail. The two data streams D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>are sent to a divider unit <b>776</b> in which D<sub>1 </sub>is divided by a divider <b>777</b> into two components; one or compressed H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>is transferred to a first input <b>521</b> of a second video decoder <b>422</b> and the other is fed to a summer <b>778</b> where it is summed with D<sub>2 </sub>prior to transfer to a second input <b>531</b> of the second video decoder <b>422</b>. Compressed H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>is then sent from the first input <b>521</b> to a first expander <b>523</b> where it is expanded to H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>of the original length which is then transferred to a video mixer <b>548</b> and an aspect ratio changing circuit <b>779</b>. When the input TV signal is an HDTV signal, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>represents a wide-screen NTSC signal. When the same is an NTSC signal, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>represents a lower resolution video signal, e.g. MPEG1, thatthan an NTSC level.
0457The input TV signal of the embodiment is an HDTV signal and H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>becomes a wide-screen NTSC signal. If the aspect ratio of an available display is 16:9, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>is directly delivered through an output unit as a 16:9 video output <b>426</b>. If the display has an aspect ratio of 4:3, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>is shifted by the aspect ratio changing circuit <b>779</b> to a letterbox or sidepanel format and then, delivered from the output unit <b>780</b> as a corresponding format video output <b>425</b>.
0458The second data stream D<sub>2 </sub>fed from the second data stream output <b>759</b> to the summer <b>778</b> is summed with the output of the divider <b>777</b> to a sum signal which is then fed to the second input <b>531</b> of the second video decoder <b>422</b>. The sum signal is further transferred to a divider circuit <b>531</b> while it is divided into three compressed forms of H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>. The three compressed signals are then fed to a second <b>535</b>, a third <b>536</b>, and a fourth expander <b>537</b> respectively for converting by expansion to H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, of the original length. The three signals are summed with H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, by the video mixer <b>548</b> to a composite HDTV signal which is fed through an output <b>546</b> of the second video decoder to the output unit <b>780</b>. Finally, the HDTV signal is delivered from the output unit <b>780</b> as an HDTV video signal <b>427</b>.
0459The output unit <b>780</b> is arranged for detecting an error rate in the second data stream of the second data stream output <b>759</b> through an error rate detector <b>782</b> and if a condition in which the error rate is high continues for a predetermined time, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>of low resolution video data systematically are produced for a predetermined time.
0460Accordingly, the multi-level signal transmission system for digital TV signal transmission and reception becomes feasible. For example, if a TV signal transmitter station is near, both the first and second data streams of a received signal can successfully be reproduced to exhibit an HDTV quality picture. If the transmitter station is far, the first data stream can be reproduced to H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>which is converted to a low resolution TV picture. Hence, any TV program will be intercepted in a wider area and displayed at a picture quality ranging from HDTV to NTSC level.
0461<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 66</figref> is a block diagram showing another arrangement of the TV receiver. As shown, the receiver unit <b>751</b> contains only a first data stream output <b>768</b> and thus, the processing of the second data stream or HDTV data is not needed so that the overall construction can be minimized. It is a good idea to have the first video decoder <b>421</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 31</figref> as a video decoder of the receiver. Accordingly, an NTSC level picture will be reproduced. The receiver is fabricated at much less cost as having no capability to receive any HDTV level signal and will widely be accepted in the market. In brief, the receiver can be used as an adapter tuner for interception of a digital TV signal with giving no modification to the existing TV system including a display.
0462When a scrambled 4-level VSB or 8-level VSB is received as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 66</figref>, the scramble cancellation signal transmitted with the 4- or 8-level VSB signal is compared by the descramble number comparator <b>502</b>b with the number stored in the descramble number register <b>502</b>c in the descrambler <b>502</b>. Only when the transmitted stored numbers match is descrambling of specific scrambled transmissions permitted.
0463The TV receiver <b>781</b> may have a further arrangement shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 67</figref>, which serves as both a satellite broadcast receiver for demodulation of PSK signals and a terrestrial broadcast receiver for demodulation of VSB signals. In operation, a PSK signal received by a satellite antenna <b>32</b> is mixed by a mixer <b>786</b> with a signal from an oscillator <b>787</b> into a low frequency signal which is then fed through an input unit <b>34</b> to a mixer <b>753</b> similar to one shown in FIG. <b>63</b>. The low frequency signal of PSK or QAM mode in a given channel of the satellite TV system is transferred to a modulatordemodulator <b>35</b> where two data streams D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>are reproduced from the signal. D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>are sent through a divider <b>788</b> to a second video decoder <b>422</b> where they are converted to a video signal which is then delivered from an output unit <b>780</b>. Also, a digital or analogue terrestrial TV signal intercepted by a terrestrial antenna <b>32</b>a is fed through an input unit <b>752</b> to the mixer <b>753</b> where one desired channel is selected in the same manner as described in FIG. <b>63</b> and converted into to a low frequency base band signal. The signal of analogue form is sent directly to the demodulator <b>35</b> for demodulation. The signal of digital form is then fed to a discrimination/demodulation circuit <b>757</b> where two data streams D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>are reproduced from the signal. D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>are converted by the second video decoder <b>422</b> into a video signal which is then delivered further. A satellite analogue TV signal is transferred to a video demodulator <b>788</b><b>7880</b>where it is ANAM modulated into an analogue video signal which is then delivered from the output unit <b>780</b>. As understood, the mixer <b>753</b> of the TV receiver <b>781</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 67</figref> is arranged to be compatible between two, satellite and terrestrial, broadcast services. Also, a receiver circuit including a detector <b>755</b> and an LPF <b>756</b> for AM modulation of an analogue signal can be utilized compatible with a digital ASK signal of the terrestrial TV seriviceservice. The major part of the arrangement shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 67</figref> is arranged for compatible use, thus minimizing a circuitry construction.
0464According to the embodiment, a 4-level ASK signal is divided into two, D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2</sub>, level components for execution of the one-bit mode multi-level signal transmission. If an 8-level ASkASK signal as shown in FIGS. <b>68</b>(a) and (b) illustrating the constellation of the 8-VSB signal, i.e., 8-level VSB signal is used, it can be transmitted in a one-bit mode three-level, D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>, and D<sub>3</sub>, arrangement, thus, three bits preper symbol in total. A shown in FIG. <b>68</b>(a), the first bit coding is done as follows. D<sub>3 </sub>is assigned to eight signal points <b>721</b>a and <b>721</b>b; <b>722</b>a and <b>722</b>b; <b>723</b>a and <b>723</b>b; and <b>724</b>a and <b>724</b>b, each pair, i.e., small group, representing a two-level pattern using one bit. Next, the second bit coding is done as follows. D<sub>2 </sub>is assigned to two signal point groups <b>721</b> and <b>722</b>; and <b>723</b> and <b>724</b>, two mid groups representing a two-level pattern using one bit. Next, the third bit coding is done as follows. D<sub>1</sub>, is assigned to two large signal point groups <b>725</b> and <b>726</b> representing a two-level pattern using one bit. More particularly, this is equivalent to a form in which each of the four signal points <b>721</b>, <b>722</b>, <b>723</b>, and <b>724</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 57</figref> is divided into two components thus producintproducing, at the maximum, three different level data.
0465As understood from the above, each of the eight signal points is assigned with three bit data (D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>, D<sub>3</sub>). For example, if left side and right side are defined as logic 0 and logic 1, respectively, the three bit data (D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>, D<sub>3</sub>) for the signal point <b>722</b>a will be (0, 1, 0). This can be explained as follows. Since the signal point <b>722</b>a is in the left side of the two large groups <b>725</b> and <b>726</b>, logic 0 is given to D<sub>1</sub>. Also, the signal point <b>722</b>a is in the right side of the two mid groups <b>721</b> and <b>722</b>, so that logic 1 is given to D<sub>2</sub>. Further the signal point <b>722</b>a is in the left side of the two small groups <b>722</b>a and <b>722</b>b, so that logic 0 is given to D<sub>3</sub>. In a similar manner, the three bit data (D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>, D<sub>3</sub>) for the signal point <b>723</b>a will be (1, 0, 0).
0466The three-level signal transmission, such as for the digital HDTV, is identical to that described in the third and fourth embodiments and will no further be explained in detail.
0467The effects of television broadcasting using the 8-level VSB shown in FIGS. <b>68</b>(a), (b), and (c) are described below.
0468While the transmitted data quantity is high with 8-level VSB, it also has a higher error rate than 4-level VSB for the same C/N value. However, in high image quality HDTV transmissions, the available transmission capacity makes it possible to apply more error correction coding, and the error rate can thus be reduced. This band capacity also enableenables multi-level (hierarchical) television broadcasts and other new features in the future.
0469The relative effects of 4-level, 8-level, and 16-level VSB are described below.
0470In ground station broadcasts using the NTSC or PAL frequency band, the usable transmission band is effectively limited to approximately 5 MHz because of the 6-MHz frequency limit of the NTSC format, for example, as shown in FIG. <b>136</b>. With 4-level VSB, the effective data transmission quantity is 5 MHz×4=20 Mbps because the frequency utilization efficiency is 4 bits/Hz. A minimum of 15 Mbps-18 Mbps is required, however, for digital HDTV signal transmission. Because there is no spare capacity with 4-level VSB, the redundancy used for error correction is only 10-20% of the HDTV effective transmission quantity as shown in the comparison chart in FIG. <b>169</b>.
0471With 8-level VSB, the effective data transmission quantity is 5 MHz×6=30 Mbps because the frequency utilization efficiency is 5 bits/Hz. While 15 Mbps-18 Mbps is required for digital HDTV signal transmission as described above, when using 8-level VSB modulation, more than 50% of the actual HDTV signal transmission quantity can be used for error correction coding as shown in FIG. <b>169</b>. As shown by error rate curves <b>805</b> and <b>806</b> in FIG. <b>161</b><b>163</b>, the error rate relative to the same C/N value in the transmission system is less with TCM 8-level VSB than with 4-level VSB, even through error correction code gain is greater with 8-level VSB than with 4-level VSB, because significantly more error correction coding can be added with 8-level VSB during ground station broadcasting of same-data-rate HDTV digital signals using the 6-MHz band. As a result, 8-level VSB with high code gain error correction coding also has the effect of enabling a larger service area for ground station HDTV broadcasts than does 4-level VSB. While the increased size of the error correction circuits required with 8-level VSB does increase the complexity of the receiver circuitry, the circuit scale of the equalizer in the receiver is significantly smaller than that of receivers using QAM modulation, which contains a phase component, because VSB and ASK are amplitude modulation methods. As a result, an 8-level VSB circuit board containing the error correction circuit is smaller than an equivalent 32-level QAM board with the same transmission capacity.
0472A digital HDTV receiver with an appropriate circuit scale and a large ground station broadcasting service area can therefore be achieved using 8-level VSB.
0473Note that the ECC <b>744</b>a and trellis encoder <b>744</b>b in the transmitter and receiver block diagrams of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 84</figref> for the present embodiment, <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 131</figref>, <b>137</b>, <b>156</b>, and <b>157</b> for embodiment 6, and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 144</figref> for embodiment 9 are used as examples of the specific error correction method, and the 4-, 8-, and 16-level VSB modulator <b>749</b> described with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 61</figref> are used for transmission. The VSB demodulator <b>760</b> described with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 63</figref> is used in the receiver to generate the digital reception data by means of the 4-, 8-, and 16-level level slicer <b>757</b> from the 4-, 8-, and 16-level VSB signal. After error correction by means of the trellis decoder <b>759</b>b and ECC decoder <b>759</b>a, described below with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 84</figref> for the present embodiment, and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 131</figref>, <b>137</b>, <b>156</b>, and <b>157</b> for embodiment 6, a digital HDTV signal is generated by the image expander of the image decoder <b>402</b>, and the digital HDTV signal is then output.
0474As shown in FIGS. <b>160</b>(a) and (b) described below with the sixth embodiment, the ECC encoder <b>744</b>a uses a Reed-Solomon encoder <b>744</b>j and interleaver <b>744</b>k, and uses a deinterleaver <b>759</b>k and Reed-Solomon decoder <b>759</b>j for the ECC decoder <b>759</b>a. Applying interleaving as described in the previous embodiment improves resistance to transmission system noise such as burst error.
0475Code gain can be further increased and the error rate decreased by using a trellis encoder as shown in FIGS. <b>128</b>(a), (b), (c), (d), (e), and (f). A ratio 2/3 trellis encoder <b>744</b>b<b>743</b>c and decoder <b>759</b>b as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 172</figref> are most appropriate with 8-level VSB because of 3 bits/symbol coding. The data quantity is compressed 2/3 in this case.
0476The embodiments have been described using primarily the example of a multilevel (hierarchical) digital television signal. While an ideal broadcasting format can be achieved using a multilevel signal, the image compression circuit and modulator/demodulator circuits become more complex, and are therefore not preferable due to cost for the start of new broadcasting services. As described at the beginning of the fifth embodiment, a broadcasting system with a simple television circuit can be achieved by using a signal-signal interval L=L<sub>0</sub>, i.e., an equal interval, in the 4-level VSB and 8-level VSB signals and a non-multilevel television transmission, and by simplifying the circuit shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 137</figref> as shown in FIG. <b>157</b>. Once the HDTV format is in common use, it is then possible to change to a hierarchical 8-level VSB transmission format.
0477Four- and 8-level VSB have been described above, and 16- and 32-level VSB are described below with reference to FIGS. <b>159</b>(a)-(b). FIG. <b>159</b>(a) shows the 16-level VSB constellation. As shown in FIG. <b>159</b>(b), the signal between two signal points is grouped into eight groups <b>722</b>a-<b>722</b>h, which are treated as eight signal points and can be treated as 8-level VSB signals to enable a two-stage multilevel transmission. In this case, multilevel transmission can be achieved with time division multiplexing even when intermittently transmitting an 8-level VSB signal. The maximum data rate with this method is 2/3. In FIG. <b>157</b>(c), the data is further grouped into four groups <b>723</b>a-<b>723</b>d, which can be handled as 4-level VSB signals adding one more level to the hierarchy. While the maximum data rate drops with time division multiplex transmission of 4-level VSB signals, multilevel transmission is possible with 3-stage multilevel VSB transmission.
0478With this method, a multilevel transmission whereby 8-level VSB or 4-level VSB data can be reproduced when the C/N ratio of the 16-level VSB data deteriorates can be achieved. By doubling the signal points of the 16-level VSB format as shown in FIG. <b>159</b>(d), 32-level VSB transmission is enabled. When 16-level VSB capacity is increased in the future, this method will maintain compatibility while making it possible to obtain a 6-bit/symbol data capacity.
0479By summarizing the above, the VSB receiver shown in the block diagram of FIG. <b>161</b> and the VSB transmitter shown in the block diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 162</figref> can be achieved.
0480While 4-level VSB and 8-level VSB are used by way of example above, 16-level VSB as shown in FIGS. <b>159</b>(a)-(c) can also be used for transmission. With 16-level VSB, a 40-Mbps transmission capacity can be used with a 6-MHz band in ground station broadcasting. Because the data rate of the HDTV digital compression signal is 15-18 Mbps using the MPEG standard, there is excessive reserve in the transmission capacity. As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 169</figref>, redundancy R<sub>16</sub>=100% or greater; redundancy is therefore too great for transmitting one channel digital HDTV, and the circuitry is simply made more complex with little additional advantage gained over 8-level VSB. In addition, 16-level VSB redundancy is only about 10%, the same as 4-level VSB redundancy, in ground station HDTV broadcasting of two programs with 16-level VSB. As a result, the service area is reduced because sufficient error correction coding cannot be applied with two-program 16-level VSB. As described before, sufficient error correction cannot be applied with 4-level VSB because the redundancy R<sub>4</sub>=10-20% and the service area is limited. As will be known from <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 169</figref>, sufficient error correction coding can be achieved with 8-level VSB because the redundancy R<sub>8</sub>=50%. A broad service area can also be achieved without significantly .
0481In particular, the arrangement of the video encoder <b>401</b> of the third embodiment shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 30</figref> is replaced by a modification of the block diagram of FIG. <b>69</b>. The operation of the modified arrangement is similar and will not be explained in greater detail. Two video signal divider circuits <b>404</b> and <b>404</b>a which may be sub-band filters are provided forming a divider unit <b>794</b>. The divider unit <b>794</b> may also be arranged more simple asimply as shown in the block diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 70</figref>, in which a signal passes across one signal divider circuit two times at time division mode. More specifically, a video signal of e.g. HDTV or super HDTV from the input unit <b>403</b> is time-base compressed by a time-base compressor <b>795</b> and fed to the divider circuit <b>404</b> where it is divided into four components, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>-H, and H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H, and H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>-H, at a first cycle. At the time, four switches <b>765</b>, <b>765</b>a, <b>765</b>b, and <b>765</b>c remain turned to the position <b>1</b> so that H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>-H, and H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H, are transmitted to a compressing circuit <b>405</b>. Meanwhile, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>-H is fed back through the terminal <b>1</b> of the switch <b>765</b>c to the time-base compressor <b>795</b>. At a second cycle, the four switches <b>765</b>, <b>765</b>a, <b>765</b>b, and <b>765</b>c turned to the position <b>2</b> and all the four components of the divider circuit <b>404</b> are simultaneously transferred to the compressing circuit <b>405</b>. Accordingly, the divider unit <b>769</b><b>794</b>of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 70</figref> arranged for time division processing of an input signal can be constructed in a simpler dividing circuit form.
0482At the receiver side, such a video decoder as described in the third embodiment and shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 30</figref> is needed for three-level transmission of a video signal. More particularly, a third video decoder <b>423</b> is provided which contains two mixers <b>556</b> and <b>556</b>a of different processing capability as shown in the block diagram of FIG. <b>71</b>.
0483Also, the third video decoder <b>423</b> may be modified in which the same action is executed with one single mixer <b>556</b> as shown in FIG. <b>72</b>. At the first timing, five swatchesswitches <b>765</b>, <b>765</b>a, <b>765</b>b, <b>765</b>c, <b>765</b>d remains turned to the position <b>1</b>. Hence, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H </sub>are fed from a first <b>522</b>, a second <b>522</b>a, a third <b>522</b>b and a fourth expander <b>522</b>c to through their respective switches to the mixer <b>556</b> where they are mixed to a single video signal. The video signal which represents H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>-H of an input high resolution video signal is then fed back through the terminal <b>1</b> of the switch <b>765</b>d to the terminal <b>2</b> of the switch <b>765</b>c. At the second timing, the four switches <b>765</b>, <b>765</b>a, <b>765</b>b, <b>765</b>c are turned to the point <b>2</b>. Thus, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>-H, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H, and H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>-H are transferred to the mixer <b>556</b> where they are mixed to a single video signal which is then sent across the terminal <b>2</b> of the switch <b>765</b>d to the output unit <b>554</b> for further delivery.
0484In this manner of time division processing of a three-level signal, two mixers can be replaced with one mixer.
0485More particularly, four components H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H </sub>are fed to produce H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>-H at the first timing. Then, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>-H, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H are fed at the second timing delayed from the first timing and mixed with H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>-H to a target video signal. It is thus essential to perform the two actions at an interval of time.
0486If the four components are overlap each other or are supplied in a variable sequence, they have to be time-base adjusted to a given sequence through using memories accompanied with their respective switches <b>765</b>, <b>765</b>a, <b>765</b>b, and <b>765</b>c. In the foregoing manner, a signal is transmitted from the transmitter at two different timing periods as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 73</figref> so that no time-base controlling circuit is needed in the receiver which is thus arranged more compactcompactly.
0487As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 73</figref>, D<sub>1 </sub>is the first data stream of a transmitting signal and H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H </sub>are transmitted on D<sub>1 </sub>channel at the period of first timing. Then, at the period of second timing, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H </sub>and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, are transmitted on D<sub>2 </sub>channel. As the signal is transmitted in a time division sequence, the encoder in the receiver can be arranged more simplesimply.
0488The technique of reducing the number of the expanders in the decoder will now be explained. FIG. <b>74</b>(b) shows a time-base assignment of four data components <b>810</b>, <b>810</b>a, <b>810</b>b, and <b>810</b>c of a signal. When other four data components <b>811</b>, <b>811</b>a, <b>811</b>b, and <b>811</b>c are inserted between the four data components <b>811</b>, <b>811</b>a, <b>811</b>b, and <b>811</b>c respectively, the latter can be transmitted at intervals of time. In operation, the second video decoder <b>422</b> shown in FIG. <b>74</b>(a) receives the four components of the first data stream D<sub>1 </sub>at a first input <b>521</b> and transfers them through a switch <b>812</b> to an expander <b>503</b> one after another.
0489More particularly, the component <b>810</b> first fed is expanded during the feeding of the component <b>811</b> and after completion of processing the component <b>810</b>, the succeeding component <b>810</b>a is fed. Hence, the expander <b>503</b> can process a row of the components at time intervals by the same time division manner as of the mixer, thus substituting for the simultaneous operation of a number of expanders.
0490<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 75</figref> is a time-base assignment of data components of an HDTV signal, in which H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>(1) of an NTSC component of the first channel signal for a TV program is allocated to a data domain <b>821</b> of D<sub>1 </sub>signal. Also, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H </sub>carrying HDTV additional components of the first channel signal are allocated to three domains <b>821</b>a, <b>821</b>b, and <b>821</b>c of D<sub>2 </sub>signal respectively. There are provided other data components <b>822</b>, <b>822</b>a, <b>822</b>b, and <b>822</b>c between the data components of the first channel signal which can thus be expanded with an expander circuit during transmission of the other data. Hence, all the data components of one channel signal will be processed by a single expander capable of operating at a higher speed.
0491Similar effects will be ensured by assignment of the data components to other domains <b>821</b>, <b>821</b>a, <b>821</b>b, and <b>821</b>c as shown in FIG. <b>76</b>. This becomes more effective in transmission and reception of a common 4 PSK or ASK signal having no different digital levels.
0492<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 77</figref> shows a time-base assignment of data components during physical two-level transmission of three different signal level data: e.g. NTSC HDTV, and super HDTV or low resolution NTSC, standard resolution NTSC, and HDTV. For example, for transmission of three data components of low resolution NTSC, standard NTSC, and HDTV, the low resolution NTSC or H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>is allocated to the data domain <b>821</b> of D<sub>1 </sub>signal. Also, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H </sub>of the standard NTSC component are allocated to three domains <b>821</b>a, <b>821</b>b, <b>821</b>c respectively. H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>-H, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H, of the HDTV component are allocated to domains <b>823</b>, <b>823</b>a, and <b>823</b>b respectively.
0493Here, as shown by the block diagrams of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 156 and 170</figref>, a logic level arrangement based on discrimination in the error correction capability as described in the second embodiment is added to 4 VSB or 8 VSB. More particularly, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>is carried on D<sub>1-1 </sub>channel of the D<sub>1 </sub>signal. The D<sub>1-1 </sub>channel is higher in the error correction capability than D<sub>1-2 </sub>channel, as described in the second embodiment. The D<sub>1-1 </sub>channel is higher in the redundancy but lower in the error rate than the D<sub>1-2 </sub>channel and the datedata <b>821</b> can be reconstructed at a lower C/N rate than that of the other data <b>821</b>a, <b>821</b>b, and <b>821</b>c. More specifically, a low resolution NTSC component will be reproduced at a far location from the transmitter antenna or in a signal attenuating or shadow area, e.g. the interior of a vehicle.
0494In view of the error rate, the data <b>821</b> of D<sub>1-1</sub>, channel is less affected by signal interference than the other data <b>821</b>a, <b>821</b>b, and <b>821</b>c of D<sub>1-2 </sub>channel, while being specifically discriminated and stayed in a different logic level, as described in the second embodiment. While D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>are divided into two physically different levels, the levels determined by discrimination of the distance between error correcting codes are arranged differently in the logic level.
0495The demodulation of D<sub>2 </sub>data requires a higher C/N rate than that for D<sub>1 </sub>data. In action, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>or low resolution NTSC signal can at least be reproduced in a distant or lower C/N service area. H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H </sub>can in addition be reproduced at a lower C/N area. Then, at a high C/N area, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>-H, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H components can also be reproduced to develop an HDTV signal. Accordingly, three different level broadcast signals can be played back. This method allows the signal receivable area shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 53</figref> to increase from a double region to a triple region, as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 90</figref>, thus ensuring a higher opportunity for enjoying TV programs.
0496FIGS.FIG. <b>78</b> is a block diagram of the third video decoder arranged for the time-base assignment of data shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 77</figref>, which is similar to that shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 72</figref> except that the third input <b>551</b> for D<sub>3 </sub>signal is eliminated and the arrangement shown in FIG. <b>74</b>(a) is added.
0497In operation, both the D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>signals are fed through two input units <b>521</b> and <b>530</b> respectively to a switch <b>812</b> at the first timing. As their components including H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>are time divided, they are transferred in a sequence by the switch <b>812</b> to an expander <b>503</b>. This sequence will now be explained referring to the time-base assignment of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 77. A</figref> compressed form of H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>of the first channel is first fed to the expander <b>503</b> where it is expanded. Then, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H </sub>are expanded. All the four expanded components are sent through a switch <b>812</b>a to a mixer <b>556</b> where they are mixed to produce H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>-H. H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>-H is then fed back from the terminal <b>1</b> of a switch <b>765</b>a through the input <b>2</b> of a switch <b>765</b> to the H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>input of the mixer <b>556</b>.
0498At the second timing, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>-H, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H of the D<sub>2 </sub>signal shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 77</figref> are fed to the expander <b>503</b> where they are expanded before transferred through the switch <b>821</b>a to the mixer <b>556</b>. They are mixed by the mixer <b>556</b> to an HDTV signal which is fed through the terminal <b>2</b> of the switch <b>765</b>a to the output unit <b>521</b> for further delivery. The time-base assignment of data components for transmission, shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 77</figref>, contributes to the simplest arrangement of the expander and mixer. Although <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 77</figref> shows two, D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2</sub>, signal levels, four-level transmission of a TV signal will be feasible using the addition of a D<sub>3 </sub>signal and a super resolution HDTV signal.
0499<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 79</figref> illustrates a time-base assignment of data components of a physical three-level, D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>, D<sub>3</sub>, TV signal, in which data components of the same channel are so arranged as not to overlap with one another with time. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 80</figref> is a block diagram of a modified video decoder <b>423</b>, similar to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 78</figref>, in which a third input <b>521</b>a is added. The time-base assignment of data components shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 79</figref> also contributes to the simple construction of the decoder.
0500The operation of the modified decoder <b>423</b> is almost identical to that shown in FIG. <b>78</b> and associated with the time-base assignment shown in FIG. <b>77</b> and will not be explained in greater detail. It is also possible to multiplex data components on the D<sub>1 </sub>signal as shown in FIG. <b>81</b>. However, two data components <b>821</b> and <b>822</b> have increased error correction capability than the other data components <b>821</b>a, <b>812</b>b, and <b>812</b>c, thus staying at a higher signal level. More particularly, the data assignment for transmissions made in one physical level but two logic level relationship. Also, each data component of the second channel is inserted between two adjacent data components of the first channel so that serial processing can be executed at the receiver side and the same effects as of the time-base assignment shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 79</figref> will thus be obtained.
0501The time-base assignment of data components shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 81</figref> is based on the logic level mode and can also be carried in the physical level mode when the bit transmission rate of the two data components <b>821</b> and <b>822</b> is decreased to ½ or ⅓ thus to lower the error rate. The physical level arrangement consists of three different levels.
0502<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 82</figref> is a block diagram of another modified video decoder <b>423</b> for decoding of the D<sub>1 </sub>signal time-base arranged as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 81</figref>, which is simpler in construction than that shown in FIG. <b>80</b>. Its operation is identical to that of the decoder shown in FIG. <b>80</b> and will not be explained in greater details.
0503As understood, the time-base assignment of data components shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 81</figref> also contributes to the similar arrangement of the expander and mixer. Also, four data components of the D<sub>1 </sub>signal are fed at respective time slices to a mixer <b>556</b>. Hence, the circuitry arrangement of the mixer <b>556</b> or a plurality of circuit blocks such as provided in the video mixer <b>548</b> of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 32</figref> may be arranged for changing the connection therebetween corresponding to each data component so that they become compatible in time division operation and thus, minimized in circuitry construction.
0504Accordingly, the receiver can be minimized in the overall construction.
0505It would be understood that the fifth embodiment is not limited to ASK modulation and the other methods including PSK and QAM modulation, such as described in the first, second, and third embodiments, will be employed with equal success.
0506Also, FSK modulation will be eligible in any of the embodiments. For example, the signal points of a multiple-level FSK signal consisting of four frequency components F<b>1</b> f<b>1</b>, f<b>2</b>, f<b>3</b>, and f<b>4</b> are divided into groups as shown in FIG. <b>58</b> and when the distance between any two groups are spaced from each other for ease of discrimination, the multi-level transmission of the FSK signal can be implemented, as illustrated in FIG. <b>83</b>.
0507More particularly, it is assumed that the frequency group <b>841</b> of f<b>1</b> and f<b>2</b> is assigned D<sub>1</sub>=0 and the group <b>842</b> of f<b>3</b> and f<b>4</b> is assigned D<sub>1</sub>=1. If f<b>1</b> and f<b>3</b> represent 0 at D<sub>2 </sub>and f<b>2</b> and f<b>4</b> represent 1 at D<sub>2</sub>, two-bit data transmission, one bit at D<sub>1 </sub>or D<sub>2</sub>, will be possible as shown in FIG. <b>83</b>. When the C/N rate is high, a combination of D<sub>1</sub>=0 and D<sub>2</sub>=1 is reconstructed at t=t3 and a combination of D<sub>1</sub>=1 and D<sub>2</sub>=0 at t=t4. When the C/N rate is low, D<sub>1</sub>=0 only is reproduced at t=t3 and D<sub>1</sub>=1 at t=t4. In this manner, the FSK signal can be transmitted in the multi-level arrangement. This multi-state FSK signal transmission is applicable to each of the third, fourth, and fifth embodiments.
0508The fifth embodiment may also be implemented in the form of a magnetic record/playback apparatus of which block diagram shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 84</figref> because its ASK mode action is appropriate to magnetic record and playback operation.
0509The effects of television broadcasting using the 8-level VSB shown in FIGS. <b>68</b>(a), (b), and (c) are described below.
0510While the transmitted data quantity is high with 8-level VSB, it also has a higher error rate than 4-level VSB for the same C/N value. However, in high image quality HDTV transmissions, the available transmission capacity makes it possible to apply more error correction coding, and the error rate can thus be reduced. This band capacity also enableenables multi-level (hierarchical) television broadcasts and other new features in the future.
0511The relative effects of 4-level, 8-level, and 16-level VSB are described below.
0512In ground station broadcasts using the NTSC or PAL frequency band, the usable transmission band is effectively limited to approximately 5 MHz because of the 6-MHz frequency limit of the NTSC format, for example, as shown in FIG. <b>136</b>. With 4-level VSB, the effective data transmission quantity is 5 MHz×4=20 Mbps because the frequency utilization efficiency is 4 bits/Hz. A minimum of 15 Mbps-18 Mbps is required, however, for digital HDTV signal transmission. Because there is no spare capacity with 4-level VSB, the redundancy used for error correction is only 10-20% of the HDTV effective transmission quantity as shown in the comparison chart in FIG. <b>169</b>. With 8-level VSB, the effective data transmission quantity is 5 MHz×6=30 Mbps because the frequency utilization efficiency is 5 bits/Hz. While 15 Mbps-18 Mbps is required for digital HDTV signal transmission as described above, when using 8-level VSB modulation, more than 50% of the actual HDTV signal transmission quantity can be used for error correction coding as shown in FIG. <b>169</b>. As shown by error rate curves <b>805</b> and <b>806</b> in FIG. <b>161</b><b>163</b>, the error rate relative to the same C/N value in the transmission system is less with TCM 8-level VSB than with 4-level VSB, even through error correction code gain is greater with 8-level VSB than with 4-level VSB, because significantly more error correction coding can be added with 8-level VSB during ground station broadcasting of same-data-rate HDTV digital signals using the 6-MHz band. As a result, 8-level VSB with high code gain error correction coding also has the effect of enabling a larger service area for ground station HDTV broadcasts than does 4-level VSB. While the increased size of the error correction circuits required with 8-level VSB does increase the complexity of the receiver circuitry, the circuit scale of the equalizer in the receiver is significantly smaller than that of receivers using QAM modulation, which contains a phase component, because VSB and ASK are amplitude modulation methods. As a result, an 8-level VSB circuit board containing the error correction circuit is smaller than an equivalent 32-level QAM board with the same transmission capacity.
0513A digital HDTV receiver with an appropriate circuit scale and a large ground station broadcasting service area can therefore be achieved using 8-level VSB.
0514Note that the ECC <b>744</b>a and trellis encoder <b>744</b>b in the transmitter and receiver block diagrams of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 84</figref> for the present embodiment, <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 131</figref>, <b>137</b>, <b>156</b>, and <b>157</b> for embodiment 6, and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 144</figref> for embodiment 9 are used as examples of the specific error correction method, and the 4-, 8-, and 16-level VSB modulator <b>749</b> described with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 61</figref> are used for transmission. The VSB demodulator <b>760</b> described with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 63</figref> is used in the receiver to generate the digital reception data by means of the 4-, 8-, and 16-level level slicer <b>757</b> from the 4-, 8-, and 16-level VSB signal. After error correction by means of the trellis decoder <b>759</b>b and ECC decoder <b>759</b>a, described below with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 84</figref> for the present embodiment, and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 131</figref>, <b>137</b>, <b>156</b>, and <b>157</b> for embodiment 6, a digital HDTV signal is generated by the image expander of the image decoder <b>402</b>, and the digital HDTV signal is then output.
0515As shown in FIGS. <b>160</b>(a) and (b) described below with the sixth embodiment, the ECC encoder <b>744</b>a uses a Reed-Solomon encoder <b>744</b>j and interleaver <b>744</b>k, and uses a deinterleaver <b>759</b>k and Reed-Solomon decoder <b>759</b>j for the ECC decoder <b>759</b>a. Applying interleaving as described in the previous embodiment improves resistance to transmission system noise such as burst error.
0516Code gain can be further increased and the error rate decreased by using a trellis encoder as shown in FIGS. <b>128</b>(a), (b), (c), (d), (e), and (f). A ratio 2/3 trellis encoder <b>744</b>b<b>743</b>c and decoder <b>759</b>b as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 172</figref> are most appropriate with 8-level VSB because of 3 bits/symbol coding. The data quantity is compressed 2/3 in this case.
0517The embodiments have been described using primarily the example of a multilevel (hierarchical) digital television signal. While an ideal broadcasting format can be achieved using a multilevel signal, the image compression circuit and modulator/demodulator circuits become more complex, and are therefore not preferable due to cost for the start of new broadcasting services. As described at the beginning of the fifth embodiment, a broadcasting system with a simple television circuit can be achieved by using a signal-signal interval L=L<sub>0</sub>, i.e., an equal interval, in the 4-level VSB and 8-level VSB signals and a non-multilevel television transmission, and by simplifying the circuit shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 137</figref> as shown in FIG. <b>157</b>. Once the HDTV format is in common use, it is then possible to change to a hierarchical 8-level VSB transmission format.
0518Four- and 8-level VSB have been described above, and 16- and 32-level VSB are described below with reference to FIGS. <b>159</b>(a)-(b). FIG. <b>159</b>(a) shows the 16-level VSB constellation. As shown in FIG. <b>159</b>(b), the signal between two signal points is grouped into eight groups <b>722</b>a-<b>722</b>h, which are treated as eight signal points and can be treated as 8-level VSB signals to enable a two-stage multilevel transmission. In this case, multilevel transmission can be achievesachieved with time division multiplexing even when intermittently transmitting an 8-level VSB signal. The maximum data rate with this method is ⅔. In FIG. <b>157</b>(c)<b>159</b>(c), the data is further grouped into four groups <b>723</b>a-<b>723</b>d, which can be handled as 4-level VSB signals adding one more level to the hierarchy. While the maximum data rate drops with time division multiplex transmission of 4-level VSB signals, multilevel transmission is possible with 3-stage multilevel VSB transmission.
0519With this method, a multilevel transmission whereby 8-level VSB or 4-level VSB data can be reproduced when the C/N ratio of the 16-level VSB data deteriorates can be achieved. By doubling the signal points of the 16-level VSB format as shown in FIG. <b>159</b>(d), 32-level VSB transmission is enabled. When 16-level VSB capacity is increased in the future, this method will maintain compatibility while making it possible to obtain a 6-bit/symbol data capacity.
0520By summarizing the above, the VSB receiver shown in the block diagram of FIG. <b>161</b> and the VSB transmitter shown in the block diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 162</figref> can be achieved.
0521While 4-level VSB and 8-level VSB are used by way of example above, 16-level VSB as shown in FIGS. <b>159</b>(a)-(c) can also be used for transmission. With 16-level VSB, a 40-Mbps transmission capacity can be used with a 6-MHz band in ground station broadcasting. Because the data rate of the HDTV digital compression signal is 15-18 Mbps using the MPEG standard, there is excessive reserve in the transmission capacity. As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 169</figref>, redundancy R<sub>16</sub>=100% or greater; redundancy is therefore too great for transmitting one channel digital HDTV, and the circuitry is simply made more complex with little additional advantage gained over 8-level VSB. In addition, 16-level VSB redundancy is only about 10%, the same as 4-level VSB redundancy, in ground station HDTV broadcasting of two programs with 16-level VSB. As a result, the service area is reduced because sufficient error correction coding cannot be applied with two-program 16-level VSB. As described before, sufficient error correction cannot be applied with 4-level VSB because the redundancy R<sub>4</sub>=10-20% and the service area is limited. As will be known from <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 169</figref>, sufficient error correction coding can be achieved with 8-level VSB because the redundancy R<sub>8</sub>=50%. A broad service area can also be achieved without significantly.
0522<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 84</figref> will now be explained in more detail. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 174</figref> is a block diagram showing a circuitry arrangement of QAM/VSB compatible modulator for multi-level transmission according to Embodiment 5. The input <b>742</b> comprises a first data stream <b>743</b> and a second data stream <b>744</b> which are combined by a processor <b>745</b> and then code allocated to I-channel and Q-channel by an I/Q mapping <b>1000</b> prior to quadrature modulation. For the VSB modulation, the I/Q mapping <b>1000</b> delivers data on one or I-axis of the two channels while the I and Q channels are the same in the level. For the QAM modulation, the code assignment is executed according to the constellation diagram. Resultant mapped signal outputs of the I/Q mapping <b>1000</b> are transmitted to two FIR filters <b>1001</b> and <b>1002</b> where they are weighted with roll-off characteristics before being supplied to DC offsets <b>1003</b> and <b>1004</b> respectively. In the VSB system, the tap coefficient values of the FIR filters <b>1001</b> and <b>1002</b> are determined so that two filter outputs are orthogonal to each other. More particularly, a pair of equal input data streams are converted by the FIR filters <b>1001</b> and <b>1002</b> to two discrete code forms which are plotted in orthogonal relationship to each other in the coordinate. Also, in the VSB system, a portion of the carrier is allowed to pass through for ease of reproduction at the receiver side. This is done at the DC offsets <b>1003</b> and <b>1004</b>. The tap coefficients of the FIR filters <b>1001</b> and <b>1002</b> are selected with a VSB/QAM selector <b>1009</b> for determining the type of modulation. A control output of the QAM/VSB selector <b>1009</b> actuates a coefficient generator <b>1008</b> for producing and delivering given coefficients to the two FIR filters <b>1001</b> and <b>1002</b>. Two outputs of the DC offsets <b>1003</b> and <b>1004</b> are fed to a data selector <b>1005</b> where their I/Q components are alternately selected to produce a VSB or QAM modulated signal. The resultant digital modulated signal of the data selector <b>1005</b> is converted by a D/A converter to its analog form which is further transmitted from an output <b>748</b>. The action of the data selector <b>1005</b> is controlled by a four-time symbol frequency clock produced and supplied from a clock generator <b>1007</b>.
0523As explained, the foregoing compatible hardware arrangement is capable of producing both QAM and VSB modulated signals by selectively determining the coefficient values of the coefficient generator <b>1008</b>.
0524<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 175</figref> is a block diagram showing another circuitry arrangement of the QAM/VSB modulator for multi-level transmission according to Embodiment 5. Two, first and second, data streams are multiplexed by a processor <b>745</b> and code allocated by an I/Q mapping <b>1000</b> to the I and Q coordinates. Resultant two, I and Q, channel data outputs of the I/Q mapping <b>1000</b> are transferred to an I/Q selector <b>1010</b> where one of the I and Q signals is selected using a four-time symbol frequency clock produced and supplied from a clock generator <b>1007</b>. The selected channel modulated signal is waveform shaped by an FIR filter <b>1011</b>, digital-to-analog converted by a D/A converter <b>1012</b>, and further transmitted through an output <b>748</b>.
0525In this arrangement, the filter circuit is simple as uniaxial although the filter processing speed has to be increased to two times that of the previous arrangement.
0526<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 176</figref> illustrates a third modification of the QAM/VSB modulator of Embodiment 5. Two, first and second, data streams are multiplexed by a processor <b>745</b> and transferred to an I/Q mapping <b>1000</b>. I and Q channel signals plotted to their respective code points by the I/Q mapping <b>1000</b> are subjected to VSB orthogonal impulse response processing of two FIR filters <b>1026</b> and <b>1027</b> and transmitted to two multipliers <b>1020</b> and <b>1021</b> respectively. The multipliers <b>1020</b> and <b>1021</b> are loaded with different waveform data determined by a cos table <b>1024</b> and a sin table <b>1023</b> respectively to which a quasi-carrier is supplied from a counter <b>1025</b>. Accordingly, the I and Q channel signals are multiplied with the cos and sin signals respectively at their respective multipliers <b>1020</b> and <b>1021</b>. Two modulated outputs of the multipliers <b>1020</b> and <b>1021</b> are fed to an adder <b>1022</b> where their I and Q data are combined. A resultant composite signal is then converted by a D/A converter <b>1006</b> to its analog form which is further delivered from an output <b>748</b>.
0527In the third modification, the carrier frequency of the analog modulated signal can be changed by varying the counting interval of the counter <b>1025</b>.
0528<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 177</figref> is a block diagram showing a Trellis decoder in the demodulator. The Trellis encoderdecoder <b>759</b>b explained with <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 84</figref> may change the coding graingain according to the level of the transmitter side and the conditions of a transmission line. Hence, a corresponding Trellis decoder is needed in the receiver side.
0529The performance of the Trellis decoder depends on how a code path is determined through internal calculation and should be associated with some path memories.
0530The results of calculation with the Trellis decoder denoted by <b>1030</b> are stored in a given number of path memories, generally <b>1032</b>, <b>1033</b>, and <b>1034</b>, merged in a path memory group <b>1031</b>. The number of the results is preliminarily determined from the needs at the receiver side, depending on e.g. the transmission channel basis or the broadcasting system of a type. For the purpose, an address control signal is supplied to a memory address generator <b>1035</b> which in turn addresses a corresponding one of the path memories to select a code path.
0531This arrangement allows the single Trellis decoder <b>1030</b> associated with the plural memories to perform multiple characteristics as acting as a number of the Trellis decoders. Thus, the demodulator will be reduced in the hardware construction as compared with a conventional circuit arrangement where a plurality of the Trellis decoders are coupled in parallel for selective use.
0532<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 178</figref> is a block diagram of a receiver for interception of VSB multi-level transmitted signals emitted in the air. It is also essential for digital broadcasting service to eliminate any signal interference which is common in the conventialconventional analog broadcasting systems.
0533For elimination of such an interference, notch filters have been used with optimum success. However, any fixed notch filter can hardly conduct a frequency offset signal used in the conventional analog broadcasting system. The receiver shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 178</figref> offers an improvement. An analog or digital signal from an antenna <b>32</b>a is selectively received by a tuner <b>752</b> and data extracted by an I/Q detector <b>1040</b>. During the detection, a frequency error correction signal is produced by an AFC detector <b>1043</b> from orthogonal data and fed back to the tuner <b>752</b>. The AFC detector <b>1043</b> is adapted to vary the feedback of the frequency error correction signal using an external control. The interference by an analog signal in a detected signal is examined by an interference detector <b>1041</b> where it is compared with stored interference patterns for identification. If the intercepted digital signal carries a cochannel interference by an analog signal, it is subjected to a notch filter characteristic action of an NTSC rejection filter <b>1042</b>. If not, the digital signal is directly passed without the rejecting action of the filter <b>1042</b>. When the interference detector <b>1041</b> has found an increase of the interference in the intercepted signal resulting from the frequency offset at the transmitter side, it causes a carrier offset detector <b>1044</b> to produce and transmit a command signal via the AFC detector <b>1043</b> to the tuner <b>752</b> for changing its local oscillation frequency. As the result, the interference level measured at the interference detector <b>1041</b> is decreased to a point which represents the optimum receiving level of the receiver. An output signal of the NTSC rejection filter <b>1042</b> is then fed to an equalizer <b>1045</b> where its ghost component of removed. In addition, a BER (bit error ratio) counter <b>1048</b> is provided for detecting remaining errors in the equalized signal and if so, the signal is fed back for optimizing the signal interception in relation to the frequency offset. Finally, the equalized signal from the equalizer <b>1045</b> is transferred to a rotator <b>1046</b> for carrier reproduction and then to a decision <b>1047</b> for reproduction of data from the corresponding code points.
0534<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 179</figref> illustrates another arrangement of the QAM/VSB compatible receiver.
0535Intercepted broadcasting waveforms including QAM and VSB signals are fed to a tuner <b>1050</b>. After tuning, an intermediate frequency signal of the selected waveform is band rejected by a filter (SAW) <b>1051</b> and converted by an analog converter <b>1052</b> to an A/D converter enable frequency. When the selected waveform is a VSB signal, it is subjected to uniaxial detection and AFC detection of a VSB detector <b>1054</b>. An A/D converter <b>1053</b> digitizes a QAM modulated signal directly and a baseband signal extracted from the VSB signal.
0536When the digitized signal is a QAM signal, it is subjected to digital AFC action of an AFC <b>1055</b>, I/Q data reconstruction of a QAM detector <b>1056</b>, and waveform shaping of a roll-off filter <b>1057</b>. The waveform shaped signal is then transmitted to a waveform equalizer <b>1059</b> for removal of unwanted ghost. The output signal of the equalizer <b>1059</b> is phase compensated by a carrier recovery <b>1060</b> and code reconstructed by a decision <b>1061</b>. Meanwhile, an AGC detector <b>1064</b> produces an AGC signal and an AFC detector <b>1062</b> calculates a frequency change from the output of the carrier recovery <b>1060</b>.
0537A code form signal of the decision <b>1061</b> is then transmitted through a deinterleaver <b>1065</b>, a Trellis decoder <b>1066</b>, a deinterleaver <b>1067</b>, and a Reed-Solomon decoder <b>1068</b> and released after an error correction.
0538The VSB signal output of the A/D converter <b>1053</b> is directly fed to the equalizer <b>1059</b> and then processed in the same manner as for the QAM signal. It is also subjected to the same error correction as the QAM signal.
0539There is a clock recovery <b>1058</b> operable with the entire symbols for the QAM signal. For the VSB signal, a clock reference signal of a burst form is extracted by a gate signal generator from the VSB output signal of the VSB detector <b>1054</b> and fed to the clock recovery <b>1058</b> for actuation of its PLL.
EMBODIMENT 6
0540A sixth embodiment of the present invention is a magnetic recording and playback apparatus in which the above transmission and recording method is employed. Although in the fifth embodiment a multiple-level ASK data transmission is described, but it is also feasible in the same manner to adopt this invention in a magnetic recording and playback apparatus of a multi-level ASK recording system as shown in the block diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 173. A</figref> multi-level or non-multilevel magnetic recording can be realized by applying the C-CDM method of the present invention to PSK, FCK, and QAM, as well as ASK.
0541First of all, the method of realizing a multi-level recording in a 16 QAM or 32 QAM magnetic recording playback apparatus will be explained in compliance with the C-CDM method of the present invention. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 84</figref> is a circuit block diagram showing a 16 QAM 32 QAM, 4 ASK, 8 ASK, 16 ASK, 8 PSK system incorporating C-CDM modulator. Hereinafter, a QAM system being multiplexed by the C-CDM method is termed as SRQAM. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 137 and 154</figref> show block diagrams in which SRQAM is applied to the transmission system, such as broadcast.
0542ASAs shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 84</figref>, an input video signal, e.g. an HDTV signal, to a magnetic record/playback apparatus <b>851</b> is divided and compressed by a video encoder <b>401</b> into a low frequency band signal through a first video encoder <b>401</b>a and a high frequency band signal through a second video encoder <b>401</b>b respectively. Then, a low frequency band component, e.g. H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, of the video signal is fed to a first data stream input <b>743</b> of an input unit <b>742</b> and a high frequency band component including H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H </sub>is fed to a second data stream input <b>744</b> of the same. The two components are further transferred to a modulator <b>749</b> of a modulator/demodulator unit <b>852</b><b>852</b>a. The first data stream input <b>743</b> adds an error correcting code to the low frequency band signal in an ECC <b>743</b>a. On the other hand, the second data stream fed into the second data stream input <b>744</b> is 2 bit in case of 16 SRQAM, 3 bit in case of 36 SRQAM, and 4 bit in case of 64 SRQAM. After an error correcting code is encoded by an ECC <b>744</b>a, this signal is supplied to a Trellis encoder <b>744</b>b, such as shown in FIGS. <b>128</b>(a), (b), (c) in which a Trellis encoded signal having a ratio 1/2 in case of 16 SRQAM, 2/3 in case 32 SRQAM, and 3/4 in case of 64 SRQAM, is produced. A 64 SRQAM signal, for example, has a first data stream of 2 bit and a second data stream of 4 bit. A Trellis encoder <b>744</b>b of FIG. <b>128</b>(c) allows this 64 SRQAM signal to perform a Trellis encoding of ratio 3/4 wherein 3 bit data is converted into 4 bit data. In the case of 4 ASK, 8 ASK, and 16 ASK, the Trellis encoding at the ratio of 1/2, 2/3, and 4/3 can be carried ourout solely. Thus, redundancy increases and a data rate decreases, while error correcting capability increases. This results in the reduction of an error rate-inrate in the same data rate. Accordingly, transmittable information amount of the recording/playback system or transmission system will increase substantially.
0543Since the 8 VSB transmission system described above in connection with the fifth embodiment takes 3 bits per symbol, the Trellis encoder <b>744</b>g and the Trellis decoder <b>744</b>q with the ratio 2/3 as shown in FIGS. <b>128</b>(b), (e) can be used, and the entire block diagram will be as shown in FIG. <b>171</b>.
0544It is, however, possible to constitute the first data stream input <b>743</b> not to include a Trellis encoder as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 84</figref> of this sixth embodiment because the first data stream has low error rate inherently. This will be advantageous in view of the simplification of circuit configuration. The second data stream, however, has a narrow inter-code distance as compared with the first data stream and, therefore, has a worse error rate. The Trellis encoding of the second data stream improves such a worse error rate. It is no doubt that an overall circuit configuration becomes simple if the Trellis encoding of the first data stream is eliminated. An operation for modulation is almost identical to that of the transmitter of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. <b>64</b> and will be not be explained in greater detail. A modulated signal of the modulator <b>749</b> is fed into a recording/playback circuit <b>853</b> in which it is AC biased by a bias generator <b>856</b> and amplified by an amplifier <b>857</b>a. Thereafter, the signal is fed to a magnetic head <b>854</b><b>854</b>b for recording onto a magnetic tape <b>855</b>.
0545A format of the recorded signal is shown in a recording signal frequency assignment of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 113. A</figref> main, e.g. 16 SRQAM, signal <b>859</b> having a carrier of frequency fc records information, and also a pilot f<sub>p </sub>signal <b>859</b>a having a frequency 2fc is recorded simultaneously. Distortion in the recording operation is lowered as a bias signal <b>859</b>b having a frequency 2fc is recorded simultaneously. Distortion in the recording operation is lowered as a bias signal <b>859</b>b having a frequency f<sub>BIAS </sub>adds AC bias for magnetic recording. Two of three-level signals shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 113</figref> are recorded in multiple state. In order to reproduce these recorded signals, two thresholds Th-<b>1</b>-<b>2</b>, Th-<b>2</b> are given. A signal <b>859</b> will reproduce all of two levels while a signal <b>859</b> will reproduce D<sub>1 </sub>data only, depending on C/N level of the recording/playback.
0546A main signal of 16 SRQAM will have a signal point assignment shown in FIG. <b>10</b>. Furthermore, a main signal of 36 SRQAM will have a signal point assignment shown in FIG. <b>100</b>. When 4 ASK, 8 ASK are used, the constellation will be as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 58</figref>, <b>68</b>(a) and (b). In reproduction of this signal, both the main signal <b>859</b> and the pilot signal <b>859</b>a are reproduced through the magnetic head <b>854</b><b>854</b>a and amplified by an amplifier <b>857</b>b. An output signal of the amplifier <b>857</b>b is fed to a carrier reproduction circuit <b>858</b> in which a filter <b>858</b>a separates the frequency of the pilot signal f<sub>p </sub>having a frequency <b>2</b>f<b>0</b><b>2</b>f<sub>0 </sub>and ½ frequency divider <b>858</b>b reproduces a carrier of frequency f<b>0</b>f<sub>0 </sub>to transfer it to a demodulator <b>760</b>. This reproduced carrier is used to demodulate the main signal in the demodulator <b>760</b>. Assuming that a magnetic recording tape <b>855</b>, e.g. HDTV tape, is of a high C/N rate, 16 signal points are discriminatable and thus both D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>are demodulated in the demodulator <b>760</b>. Subsequently, a video decoder <b>402</b>reproducereproduces all the signals. An HDTV VCR can reproduce a high bit-rate TV signal such as 15 Mbps HDTV signal. The lowlower the C/N rate is, the cheaper the cost of a video tape is. So far, a VHS tape in the market is inferior more than 10 dB in C/N rate to a full-scale broadcast tape. If a video tape <b>855</b> is of low C/N rate, it will not be able to discriminate all the 16 or 32 valued signal points. Therefore the first data stream D<sub>1 </sub>can be reproduced, while a 2 bit, 3 bit, or 4 bit data stream of the second data stream D<sub>2 </sub>cannot be reproduced. Only 2 bit data stream of the first data stream is reproduced. If a two-level HDTV video signal is recorded and reproduced, a low C/N tape having insufficient capability of reproducing a high frequency band video signal can output only a low rate low frequency band video signal of the first data stream, specifically e.g. a 7 Mbps wide NTSC TV signal.
0547As shown in a block diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 144</figref>, a second data stream output <b>759</b>, the second data stream input <b>744</b>, and the second video decoder <b>402</b>a can be eliminated in order to provide customers one aspect of lower grade products. In this case, a recording/playback apparatus <b>851</b>, dedicated to a low bit rate, will include a modulator such as a modulated QPSK which modulates or demodulates the first datedata stream only. This apparatus allows only the first data stream to be recorded and reproduced. Specifically, a wide NTSC grade video signal can be recorded and reproduced.
0548Above-described high C/N rate video tape <b>855</b> capable of recording a high bit-rate signal, e.g. HDTV signal, will be able to usebe used in such a low bit-rate dedicated magnetic recording/playback apparatus but will reproduce the first data stream D<sub>1 </sub>only. That is, the wide NTSC signal is outputted, while the second data stream is not reproduced. In other words, one recording/playback apparatus having a complicated configuration can reproduce aan HDTV signal and the other recording/playback apparatus having a simple configuration can reproduce a wide NTSC signal if a given video tape <b>855</b> includes the same multi-level HDTV signal. Accordingly in case of two-level multiple state, four combinations will be realized with prefectperfect compatibility among two tapes having different C/N rates and two recording/playback apparatus having different recording/playback data rates. This will bring a remarkable effect. In this case, an NTSC dedicated apparatus will be simple in construction as compared with an HDTV dedicated apparatus. In more detail, a circuitry scale of ECTVEDTV decoder will be ⅙ of that of HDTV decoder. Therefore, a low function apparatus can be realized at fairly low cost. Realization of two, HDTV and EDTV, types recording/playback apparatus having different recording/reproducing capability of picture quality will provide various type products ranging in a wide price range. Users can freely select a tape among a plurality of tapes from an expensive high C/N rate tape to a cheaper low C/N rate tape, as occasion demands so as to satisfy required picture quality. Not only maintaining perfect compatibility but obtaining expandable capability will be attained and further compatibility with a future system will be ensured. Consequently, it will be possible to establish long-lasting standards for recording/playback apparatus. Other recording methods will be used in the same manner. For example, a multi-level recording will be realized by use of phase modulation explained in the first and third embodiments. A recording using ASK explained in the fifth embodiment will also be possible. A two or three multi-level state will be realized by converting present recording from two-level to four-level ASK or to eight-level ASK and dividing into two group as shown in FIGS. <b>59</b>(c) and <b>59</b>(d) or in FIGS. <b>68</b>(a) and <b>68</b>(b).
0549A circuit block diagram for ASK will be asis shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 173</figref> which is similar to that disclosed in FIG. <b>84</b>. By the combination of Trellis and ASK, the error rate will be reduced. Besides embodiments already described, a multi-level recording will be also realized by use of multiple tracks on a magnetic typetape. Furthermore, a theoretical multi-level recording will be feasible by differentiating the error correcting capability so as to discriminate respective data.
0550Compatibility with future standards will be described below. A setting of standards for recording/playback apparatus such as VCR is normally done by taking account of the most highest C/N rate tape available in practice. The recording characteristics of a tape progresses rapidly. For example, the C/N rate has been improved more than 10 dB compared with the tape used 10 years ago. If it is supposed that new standards will be established after 10 to 20 years due to an advanent of tape property, a conventional method will encounter with difficulty in maintaining compatibility with older standards. New and old standards, in fact, used to be one-way compatible or non-compatible with each other. On the contrary, in accordance with the present invention, the standards are first of all established for recording and/or reproducing the first data stream and/or second data stream on present day tapes. Subsequently, if the C/N rate is improved magnificently in future, an upper level data stream, e.g. a third data stream, will be added without any difficulty as long as the present inventions incorporated in the system. For example, a super HDTV VCR capable of recording or reproducing three-level 64 SRQAM or 8 ASK will be realized while maintaining perfect compatibility with the conventional standards. A magnetic tape, recording first to third data streams in compliance with new standards, will be able to use, of course, in the older two-level magnetic recording/playback apparatus capable of recording and/or reproducing only first and second data streams. In this case, first and second data streams can be reproduced perfectly although the third data stream is left non-reproduced. Therefore, an HDTV signal can be reproduced. For these reasons, the merit of expanding recording data amount while maintaining compatibility between new and old standards is expected.
0551Returning to the explanation of reproducing operation of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 84</figref>, the magnetic head <b>854</b><b>854</b>a and the magnetic reproduction circuit <b>853</b><b>858</b>reproduce a reproducing signal from the magnetic tape <b>855</b> and feedsfeed it to the modulation/demodulation circuit <b>852</b>a demodulator unit <b>852</b>b. The demodulating operation is almost identical with that of first, third, and fourth embodiments and will no further be explained. The demodulator <b>760</b> reproduces the first and second data stream D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2</sub>. The second data stream D<sub>2 </sub>is error corrected with high code gain in a Trellis-decoder <b>759</b>b such as a Vitabi decoder, so as to be low error rate. The video decoder <b>402</b> demodulates D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>signals to output an HDTV video signal.
0552<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 131</figref> is a block diagram showing a three-level magnetic recording/playback apparatus in accordance with the present invention which includes one theoretical level in addition to two physical levels. This system is substantially the same as that of FIG. <b>84</b>. The difference is that the first data stream is further divided into two subchannels by use of a TDM in order to realize a three-level constitution.
0553As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 131</figref>, an HDTV signal is separated first of all into two, medium and low frequency band video signals D<sub>1-1 </sub>and D<sub>1-2</sub>, through a <b>1</b>-<b>1</b> video encoder <b>401</b>c and a <b>1</b>-<b>2</b> video encoder <b>401</b>d and, thereafter, fed into a first data stream input <b>743</b> of an input section <b>742</b>. The data stream D<sub>1-1 </sub>having a picture quality of MPEG grade is error correcting coded with high code gain in an ECC coder <b>743</b>a, while the data stream D<sub>1-2 </sub>is error correcting coded with normal code gain in an ECC encoder <b>743</b>b. D<sub>1-1 </sub>and D<sub>1-2 </sub>are time multiplexed together in a TDM <b>743</b>c to be one data stream D<b>1</b>. D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>are modulated into two-level signals in a C-CDM <b>749</b> and then recorded on the magnetic tape <b>855</b> through the magnetic head <b>854</b>.
0554In playback operation, a recording signal reproduced through the magnetic head <b>854</b> is demodulated into D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>by the C-CDM demodulator <b>760</b> in the same manner as in the explanation of FIG. <b>84</b>. The first data stream D<sub>1 </sub>is demodulated into two, D<sub>1-1 </sub>and D<sub>1-2</sub>, subchannels through the TDM <b>758</b>c provided in the first data stream output <b>758</b>. D<sub>1-1 </sub>data is error corrected in an ECC decoder <b>758</b>a having high code gain. Therefore, D<sub>1-1 </sub>data can be demodulated at a lower C/N rate as compared with D<sub>1-2 </sub>data. A <b>1</b>-<b>1</b> video decoder <b>402</b>a decodes the D<sub>1-1 </sub>data and outputs an LDTV signal. On the other hand, D<sub>1-2 </sub>data is error corrected in an ECC decoder <b>75</b><b>8</b>b<b>758</b>b having normal code gain. Therefore, D<sub>1-2 </sub>data has a threshold value of high C/N rate compared with D<sub>1-1 </sub>data and thus will not be demodulated when a signal level is not large. D<sub>1-2 </sub>data is then demodulated in a <b>1</b>-<b>2</b> video decoder <b>4</b><b>02</b>d<b>402</b>d and summed with D<sub>1-1 </sub>data to output an EDTV signal of wide NTSC grade.
0555The second data stream D<sub>2 </sub>is Vitabi demodulated in a Trellis decoder <b>759</b>b and error corrected at an ECC decoder <b>7</b><b>59</b>a<b>759</b>a. Thereafter, D<sub>2 </sub>data is converted into a high frequency band video signal through a second video decoder <b>402</b>b and, then, summed with D<sub>1-1 </sub>and D<sub>1-2 </sub>data to output an HDTV signal. In this case, a threshold value of the C/N rate of D<sub>2 </sub>data is set larger than that of C/N rate of D<sub>1-2 </sub>data. Accordingly, D<sub>1-1 </sub>data, i.e. an LDTV signal, will be reproduced from a tape <b>855</b> having a smaller C/N rate. D<sub>1-1 </sub>and D<sub>1-2 </sub>data, i.e. an EDTV signal, will be reproduced from a tape <b>855</b> having a normal C/N rate. And, D<sub>1-1</sub>, D<sub>1-2</sub>, and D<sub>2</sub>, i.e. an HDTV signal, will be reproduced from a tape <b>855</b> having a high C/N rate.
0556Three-level magnetic recording/playback apparatus can be realized in this manner. As described in the foregoing description, the tape <b>855</b> has an interrelation between C/N rate and cost. The present invention allows users to select a grade of tape in accordance with a content of TV program they want to record because video signals having picture qualities of three grades are recorded and/or reproduced in accordance with tape cost.
0557Next, an effect of multi-level recording will be described with respect to fast feed playback. As shown in a recording track diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 132</figref>, a recording track <b>855</b>a having an azimuth angle A and a recording track <b>855</b>b having an opposite azimuth angle B are alternately arrayed on the magnetic tape <b>855</b>. The recording track <b>855</b>a has a recording region <b>855</b>c at its central portion and the remainder as D<sub>1-2 </sub>recording regions <b>855</b>d, as denoted in the drawing. This unique recording pattern is provided on at least one of several recording tracks. The recording region <b>855</b>c records one frame of LDTV signal. A high frequency band signal D<sub>2 </sub>is recorded on a D<sub>2 </sub>recording region <b>855</b>e corresponding to an entire recording region of the recording track <b>855</b>a. This recording format causes no novel effect against a normal speed recording/playback operation.
0558A fast feed reproduction in a reverse direction does not allow a magnetic head trace <b>855</b>f having an azimuth angle A to coincide with the magnetic track as shown in the drawing. As the present invention provides the D<sub>1-1 </sub>recording region <b>8</b><b>55</b>c<b>855</b>c at a central narrow region of the magnetic tape as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 132</figref>, this region only is surely reproduced although it occurs at a predetermined probability. Thus reproduced D<sub>1-1 </sub>signal can demodulate an entire picture plane of the same time although its picture quality is an LDTV of MPEG1 level. In this manner several to several tens LDTV signals per second can be reproduced with perfect picture images during the fast feed playback operation, thereby enabling users to surely confirm picture images during the fast feed operation.
0559A head trace <b>855</b>g corresponds to a head trace in the reverse playback operation, from which it is understood only a part of the magnetic track is traced in the reverse playback operation. The recording/playback format shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 132</figref> however allows, even in such a reverse playback operation, to reproduce D<sub>1-1 </sub>recording region and, therefore, an animation of LDTV grade is outputted intermittently.
0560Accordingly, the present invention makes it possible to record a picture image of LDTV grade within a narrow region on the recording track, which results in intermittent reproduction of almost perfect still pictures with picture quality of LDTV grade during normal and reverse fast feed playback operations. Thus, the users can easily confirm picture images even in high-speed seaching.
0561Next, another method will be described to respond a higher speed fast feed playback operation. A D<sub>1-1 </sub>recording region <b>855</b>c is provided as shown at lower right of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 132</figref>, so that one frame of LDTV signal is recorded thereon. Furthermore, a narrow D<sub>1-1</sub>·D<sub>2 </sub>recording region <b>855</b>h is provided at a part of the D<sub>1-1 </sub>recording region <b>855</b>c. A subchannel D<sub>1-1 </sub>in this region records a part of information relating to the one frame of LDTV signal. The remainder of the LDTV information is recorded on the D<sub>2 </sub>recording region <b>855</b>j of the D<sub>1-1</sub>·D<sub>2 </sub>recording region <b>855</b>h in a duplicated manner. The subchannel D<sub>2 </sub>has a data recording capacity 3 to 5 times as much as the subchannel D<sub>1-1</sub>. Therefore, subchannels D<sub>1-1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>can record one frame information of LDTV signal on a smaller, <b>1</b>/<b>3</b><img file="USRE40134E_D0008.tif" />/<b>5</b><b>1</b>/<b>3</b>˜<b>1</b>/<b>5</b>, area of the recording tape. As the head trace can be recorded in a further narrower regions <b>855</b>h, <b>855</b>j, both time and area are decreased into <b>1</b>/<b>3</b><img file="USRE40134E_D0009.tif" />/<b>5</b><b>1</b>/<b>3</b>˜<b>1</b>/<b>5</b>as compared with a head trace time T<sub>S1</sub>. Even if the trace of head is further inclined by increasing fast feed speed amount, the probability of entirely tracing this region will be increased. Accordingly, perfect LDTV picture images will be intermittently reproduced even if the fast feed speed is increased up to 3 to 5 times as fast as the case of the subchannel D<sub>1-1 </sub>only.
0562In case of a two-level VCR, this method is useless in reproducing the D<sub>2 </sub>recording region <b>855</b>j and therefore this region will not be reproduced in a high-speed fast feed playback operation. On the other hand, a three-level high performance VCR will allow users to confirm a picture image even if a fast feed playback operation is executed at a faster, 3 to 5 times as fast as two-level VCR, speed. In other words, not only excellent picture quality is obtained in accordance with the cost but a maximum fast feed speed capable of reproducing picture images can be increased in accordance with the cost.
0563Although this embodiment utilizes a multi-level modulation system, it is needless to say that a normal, e.g. 16 QAM, modulation system can also be adopted to realize the fast feed playback operation in accordance with the present invention as long as an encoding of picture images is of multiple type.
0564A recording method of a conventional non-multiple digital VCR, in which picture images are highly compressed, disperses video data uniformly. Therefore, it was not possible in a fast feed playback operation to reproduce all the picture images on a picture plane of the same time. The picture reproduced was the one consisting of a plurality of picture image blocks having non-coincident time bases. The present invention, however, provides a multi-level HDTV VCR which can reproduce picture image blocks having coincided time bases on a picture plane during a fast feed playback operation although its picture quality is of LDTV grade.
0565The three-level recording in accordance with the present invention will be able to reproduce a high resolution TV signal such as HDTV signal when the recording/playback system has a high C/N rate. Meanwhile, a TV signal of EDTV grade, e.g. a wide NTSC signal, or a TV signal of LDTV grade, e.g. a low resolution NTSC signal, will be outputted when the recording/playback system has a low C/N rate or poor function.
0566As it is described in the foregoing description, the magnetic recording/playback apparatus in accordance with the present invention can reproduce picture images consisting of the same content even if C/N rate is low or error rate is high, although the resolution or the picture quality is relatively low.
EMBODIMENT 7
0567A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described for execution of four-level video signal transmission. A combination of the four-level signal transmission and the four-level video data construction will create a four-level signal service area as shown in FIG. <b>91</b>. The four-level service area is consisted of, from innermost, a first <b>890</b>a, a second <b>890</b>b, a third <b>890</b>c, and a fourth signal receiving area <b>890</b>d. The method of developing such a four-level service area will be explained in more detail.
0568The four-level arrangement can be implemented by using four physically different levels determined through modulation or four logic levels defined by data discrimination in the error correction capability. The former provides a large difference in the C/N rate between two adjacent levels and the C/N rate has to be increased to discriminate all the four levels from each other. The latter is based on the action of demodulation and a difference in the C/N rate between two adjacent levels should stay at minimum. Hence, the four-level arrangement is best constructed using a combination of two physical levels and two logic levels. The division of a video signal into four signal levels will be explained.
0569<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 93</figref> is a block diagram of a divider circuit <b>3</b> which comprises a video divider <b>895</b> and four compressors <b>405</b>a, <b>405</b>b, <b>405</b>c, and <b>405</b>d. The video divider <b>895</b> contains three dividers <b>404</b>a, <b>404</b>b, and <b>404</b>c which are arranged identical to the divider circuit <b>404</b> of the first video encoder <b>401</b> shown in FIG. <b>30</b> and will be not be explained in greater detail. An input video signal is divided by the dividers into four components, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>of low resolution data, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H </sub>of high resolution data, and H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H </sub>and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L </sub>for medium resolution data. The resolution of H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>is a half that of the original input signal.
0570The input video signal is first divided by the divider <b>4</b><b>04</b>a<b>404</b>a into two, high and low, frequency band components, each component being divided into two, horizontal and vertical, segments. The intermediate between the high and low frequency ranges is a dividing point according to the embodiment. Hence, if the input video signal is an HDTV signal of 1000 line vertical resolution, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>has a vertical resolution of 500 lines and a horizontal resolution of a half value.
0571Each of two, horizontal and vertical, data of the low frequency component H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>is further divided by the divider <b>404</b>c into two frequency band segments. Hence, an H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>segment output is 250 lines in the vertical resolution and ¼ of the original horizontal resolution. This output of the divider <b>404</b>c which is termed as an LL signal is then compressed by the compressor <b>405</b>a to a D<sub>1-1 </sub>signal.
0572The other three higher frequency segments of H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>are mixed by a mixer <b>772</b>c to an LH signal which is then compressed by the compressor <b>405</b>b to a D<sub>1-2 </sub>signal. The compressor <b>405</b>b may be replaced by three compressors provided between the divider <b>404</b>c and the mixer <b>772</b>c.
0573H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>L</sub>, and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H </sub>form from the divider <b>404</b>a are mixed by a mixer <b>772</b>a to an H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H signal. If the input signal is as high as 1000 lines in both horizontal and vertical resolution, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H has 500 to 1000 lines of a horizontal and a vertical resolution. H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H is fed to the divider <b>404</b>b where it is divided again into four components.
0574Similarly, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>from the divider <b>404</b>b has 500 to 750 lines of a horizontal and a vertical resolution and transferred as an H<sub>L </sub>signal to the compressor <b>405</b>c. The other three components, H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H </sub>and H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>, from the divider <b>404</b>b have 750 to 1000 lines of a horizontal and a vertical resolution and are mixed by a mixer <b>772</b>b to an HH signal which is then compressed by the compressor <b>405</b>d and delivered as a D<sub>202</sub>D<sub>2-2 </sub>signal. After compression, the HL signal is delivered as a D<sub>2-1 </sub>signal. As the result, LL or D<sub>1-1 </sub>carries a frequency data of 0 to 250 lines, LH or D<sub>1-2 </sub>carries a frequency data from more than 250 lines up to 500 lines, HL or D<sub>2-1</sub>, carries a frequency data of more than 500 lines up to 750 lines, and HH or D<sub>2-2 </sub>carries a frequency data of more than 750 lines to 1000 lines so that the divider circuit <b>3</b> can provide a four-level signal. Accordingly, when the divider circuit <b>3</b> of the transmitter <b>1</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 87</figref> is replaced by the divider circuit of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 93</figref>, the transmission of a four-level signal will be implemented.
0575The combination of multi-level data and multi-level transmission allows a video signal to be at steps declined in the picture quality in proportion to the C/N rate during transmission, thus contributing to the enlargement of the TV broadcast service area. At the receiving side, the action of demodulation and reconstruction is identical to that of the second receiver of the second embodiment shown in FIG. <b>88</b> and will not be explained in greater detail. In particular, the mixer <b>37</b> is modified for video signal transmission rather than data communications and will now be explained in more detail.
0576As described in the second embodiment, a received signal after being demodulated and error corrected, is fed as a set of four components D<sub>1-1</sub>, D<sub>1-2</sub>, D<sub>2-1</sub>, and D<sub>2-2 </sub>to the mixer <b>37</b> of the second receiver <b>33</b> of FIG. <b>88</b>.
0577<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 94</figref> is a block diagram of a modified mixer <b>33</b> in which D<sub>1-1</sub>, D<sub>1-2</sub>, D<sub>2-1</sub>, and D<sub>2-2 </sub>are explained by their respective expanders <b>523</b>a, <b>523</b>b, <b>523</b>c, and <b>523</b>d to an LL, andan LH, an HL, and an HH signal respectively which are equivalent to those described with FIG. <b>93</b>. If the bandwidth of the input signal is 1, LL has a bandwidth of ¼, LL+LH has a bandwidth of ½, LL+LH+HL has a bandwidth of ¾, and LL+LH+HL+HH has a bandwidth of 1. The LH signal is then divided by a divider <b>531</b>a and mixed by a video mixer <b>548</b>a with the LL signal. An output of the video mixer <b>548</b>a is transferred to an H<sub>L</sub>V<sub>L </sub>terminal of a video mixer <b>548</b>c. The video mixer <b>531</b>a is identical to that of the second decoder <b>527</b> of FIG. <b>32</b> and will not be explained in greater detail. Also, the HH signal is divided by a divider <b>531</b>b and fed to a video mixer <b>548</b>b. At the video mixer <b>548</b>b, the HH signal is mixed with the HL signal to an H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H signal which is then divided by a divider <b>531</b>c and sent to the video mixer <b>548</b>c. At the video mixer <b>548</b>c, H<sub>H</sub>V<sub>H</sub>-H is combined with the sum signal of LH and LL to a video output. The video output of the mixer <b>33</b> is then transferred to the output unit <b>36</b> of the second receiver shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 88</figref> where it is converted to a TV signal for delivery. If the original signal has 1050 lines of vertical resolution or is an HDTV signal of about 1000 -line resolution, its four different signal level components can be intercepted in their respective signal receiving areas shown in FIG. <b>91</b>.
0578The picture quality of the four different components will be described in more detail. The illustration of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 92</figref> represents a combination of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIGS. 86 and 91</figref>. As apparent, when the C/N rate increases, the overall signal level of amount of data is increased from <b>862</b>d to <b>862</b>a by steps of four signal levels D<sub>1-1</sub>, D<sub>1-2</sub>, D<sub>2-1</sub>, D<sub>2-2</sub>.
0579Also, as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 95</figref>, the four different level components LL, LH, HL, and HH are accumulated in proportion to the C/N rate. More specifically, the quality of a reproduced picture will be increased as the distance from a transmitter antenna becomes small. When L=Ld, LL component is reproduced. When L=Lc, LL+LH signal is reproduced. When L=Lb, LL+LH+HL signal is reproduced. When L=La, LL+LH+HL+HH signal is reproduced. As the result, if the bandwidth of the original signal is 1, the picture quality is enhanced at ¼ increments of bandwidth from ¼ to 1 depending on the receiving area. If the original signal is an HDTV of 1000-line vertical resolution, a reproduced TV signal is 250, 50 0500, 750, and 1000 lines in the resolution at their respective receiving areas. The picture quality will thus be varied at steps depending on the level of a signal. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 96</figref> shows the signal propagation of a conventional digital HDTV signal transmission system, in which no signal reproduction will be possible when the C/N rate is less than V<b>0</b>. Also, signal interception will hardly be guaranteed at signal interference regions, shadow regions, and other signal attenuating regions, denoted by the symbol x, of the service area. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 97</figref> shows the signal propagation of an HDTV signal transmission system of the present invention. As shown, the picture quality will be a full 1000-line grade at the distance La where C/N=a, a 750-line grade at the distance Lb where C/N=b, a 500-line grade at the distance Lc where C/N=c, and a 250-line grade are the distance Ld where C/N=d. Within the distance La, there are shown unfavorable regions where the C/N rate drops sharply and no HDTV quality picture will be reproduced. As understood, a lower picture quality signal can however be intercepted and reproduced according to the multi-level signal transmission system of the present invention. For example, the picture quality will be a 750-line grade at the point B in a building shadow area, a 250-line grade at the point D in a running train, a 750-line grade at the point F in a ghost developing area, a 250-line grade at the point G in a running car, a 250-line grade at the point L in a neighbor signal interference area. As set forth above, the signal transmission system of the present invention allows a TV signal to be successfully received at a grade in the area where the conventional system is poorly qualified, thus increasing its service area. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 98</figref>shownshows an example of simultaneous broadcasting of four different TV programs, in which three quality programs C, B, A are transmitted on their respective channels D<sub>1-2</sub>, D<sub>2-1</sub>, D<sub>2-2 </sub>while a program D identical to that of a local analogue TV station is propagated on the D<sub>1-1 </sub>channel. Accordingly, while the program D is kept available at simulcast service, the other three programs can also be distributed on air for offering a multiple program broadcast service.
EMBODIMENT 8
0580Hereinafter, an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be explained referring to the drawings. The eighth embodiment employs a multi-level signal transmission system of the present invention for a transmitter/receiver in a cellular telephone system.
0581<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 115</figref> is a block diagram showing a transmitter/receiver of a portable telephone, in which a telephone conversation sound inputted across a microphone <b>76</b><b>2</b><b>762</b>is compressed and coded in a compressor <b>405</b> into multi-level, D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>, and D<sub>3</sub>, data previously described. These D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>, and D<sub>3 </sub>data are time divided in a time division circuit <b>765</b> into predetermined time slots and, then, modulated in a modulator <b>4</b> into a multi-level, e.g. SRQAM, signal previously described. Thereafter, an antenna sharing unit <b>764</b> and an antenna <b>22</b> transmit a carrier wave carrying a modulated signal, which will be intercepted by a base station later described and further transmitted to other base stations or a central telephone exchanger so as to communicate with other telephones.
0582On the contrary, the antenna <b>22</b> receives transmission radio waves from other base stations as communication signals from other telephones. A received signal is demodulated in a multiple-level, e.g. SRQAM, type demodulator <b>45</b> into D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>, and D<sub>3 </sub>data. A timing circuit <b>767</b> detects timing signals on the basis of demodulated signals. These timing signals are fed into the time division circuit <b>765</b>. Demodulated signals D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>, and D<sub>3 </sub>are fed into an expander <b>503</b> and expanded into a sound signal, which are transmitted to a speaker <b>763</b> and converted into sound.
0583<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 116</figref> shows a block diagram exemplarily showing an arrangement of base stations, in which three base stations <b>7</b><b>71</b><b>771</b>, <b>772</b>, and <b>773</b> locate at center of respective receiving cells <b>768</b>, <b>769</b>, and <b>770</b> of hexagon or circle. These base stations <b>771</b>, <b>772</b>, and <b>773</b> respectively hashave a plurality of transmitter/receiver units <b>761</b>a-<b>761</b>j each similar to that of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 115</figref> so as to have data communication channels equivalent to the number of these transmitter/receiver units. A base station controller <b>774</b> is connected to all the base stations and always monitors a communication traffic amount of each base station. Based on the monitoring result, the base station controller <b>774</b> carries out an overall system control including allocation of channel frequencies to respective base stations or control of receiving cells of respective base stations.
0584<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 117</figref> is a view showing a traffic distribution of communication amount in a conventional, e.g. QPSK, system. A diagram d=A shows data <b>774</b>a and <b>774</b>b having frequency utilization efficiency 2 bit/Hz, and a diagram d=B shows data <b>774</b>c of frequency utilization efficiency 2 bit/Hz. A summation of these data <b>774</b>a, <b>774</b>b, and <b>774</b>c becomes a data <b>774</b>d, which represents a transmission amount of Ach consisting of receiving cells <b>768</b> and <b>770</b>. Frequency utilization efficiency of 2 bit/Hz is uniformly distributed. However, density of population in an actual urban area is locally high in several crowded areas <b>775</b>a, <b>775</b>b, and <b>775</b>c which includes buildings concentrated. A dataData <b>774</b>e representing a communication traffic amount shows several peaks at locations just corresponding to these crowded areas <b>775</b>a, <b>775</b>b, and <b>775</b>c, in contrast with other areas having a small communication amount. A capacity of conventional cellular telephone was uniformly set to 2 bit/Hz frequency efficiency at entire region as shown by the data <b>774</b>d irrespective of actual traffic amount TF shown by the data <b>774</b>e. It is not not effective to give the same frequency efficiency regardless of actual traffics amount. In order to compensate for this ineffectiveness, the conventional systems have allocated many frequencies to the regions having a large traffic amount, increased channel number, or decreased the receiving cells thereof. However, an increase of channel number is restricted by the frequency spectrum. Furthermore, conventional multi-level; e.g. 16 QAM or 64 QAM, mode transmission systems increase transmission power. A reduction in the receiving cells will induce an increase in number of base stations, thus increasing installation cost.
0585It is ideal for the improvement of an overall system efficiency to increase the frequency efficiency of the region having a larger traffic amount and decrease the frequency efficiency of the region having a smaller traffic amount. A multi-level signal transmission system in accordance with the present invention realizes this ideal modification. This will be explained with reference to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 118</figref> showing a communication amount &and traffic distribution in accordance with the eighth embodiment of the present invention.
0586More specifically, <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 118</figref> shows communication amounts of respective receiving cells <b>770</b>b, <b>768</b>, <b>769</b>, <b>770</b>, and <b>770</b>a taken along a line A—A′. The receiving cells <b>768</b> and <b>770</b> utilize frequencies of a channel group A, while the receiving cells <b>770</b>b, <b>769</b>, and <b>770</b>a utilize frequencies of a channel group B which does not overlap with the cannelchannel group A. The base station controller <b>774</b> shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 116</figref> increases or decreases the channel number of these channels in accordance with the traffic amount of respective receiving cells. In <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 118</figref>, a diagram d=A represents a distribution of a communication amount of the A channel. A diagram d=B represents a distribution of a communication amount of the B channel. A diagram d=A+B represents a distribution of a communication amount of all the channels. A diagram TF represents a communication traffic amount, and a diagram P shows a distribution of buildings and population.
0587The receiving cells <b>768</b>, <b>769</b>, and <b>770</b> employ the multi-level, e.g. SRQAM, signal transmission system. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a frequency utilization efficiency of 6 bit/Hz, three times as large as 2 bit/Hz of QPSK, in the vicinity of the base stations as denoted by data <b>776</b>a, <b>776</b>b, and <b>776</b>c. Meanwhile, the frequency utilization efficiency decreases at steps from 6 bit/Hz to 4 bit/Hz, and 4 bit/Hz to 2 bit/Hz, as it goes to suburban area. ifIf the transmission power is insufficient, 2 bit/Hz areas become narrower than the receiving cells, denoted by dotted lines <b>777</b>a, <b>777</b>b, and <b>777</b>c, of QPSK. However, an equivalent receiving cell will be easily obtained by slightly increasing the transmission power of the base stations.
0588Transmitting/receiving operation of a mobile station capable of responding to a 64 SRQAM signal is carried out by use of modified QPSK, which is obtained by setsetting a shift amount of SRQAM to S=1, at the place far from the base station, by use of 16 SRQAM at a place not so far from the same, and 64 SRQAM at the near place. Accordingly, the maximum transmission power does not increase as compared with QPSK.
0589Furthermore, 4 SRQAM type transmitter/receiver, whose circuit configuration is simplified as shown in a block diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 121</figref>, will be able to communicate with other telephones while maintaining compatibility. That will be the same in 16 SRQAM type transmitter/receiver shown in a block diagram of FIG. <b>122</b>. As a result, three different type telephones having different modulation systems will be provided. Small in size and light in weight is important for portable telephones. In this regard, the 4 SRQAM system having a simple circuit configuration will be suitable for the users who want a small and light telephone although its frequency utilization efficiency is low and therefore the cost of a call may increase. In this manner, the present invention system can suit a wide variety of usage.
0590As is explained above, the transmission system having a distribution like d=A+B of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 118</figref>, whose capacity is locally altered, is accomplished. Therefore, an overall frequency utilization efficiency will be much effectively improved if layout of base stations is determined to fit for the actual traffic amount denoted by TF. Especially, effect of the present invention will be large in a micro cell system, whose receiving cells are smaller and therefore numerous sub base stations are required. Because a large number of sub base stations can be easily installed at the place having a large traffic amount.
0591Next, data assignment of each time slot will be explained referring to <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 119</figref>, wherein FIG. <b>199</b>(a) shows a conventional time slot and FIG. <b>119</b>(b) shows a time slot according to the eighth embodiment. The conventional system performs a down, i.e. from a base station to a terminal station, transmission as shown in FIG. <b>119</b>(a), in which a sync signal S is transmitted by a time slot <b>780</b>a and transmission signals to respective terminal stations of A, B, C channels by time slots <b>780</b>b, <b>780</b>c, and <b>780</b>d respectively at a frequency A. On the other hand, an up, i.e. from the mobile station to the base station, transmission is performed in such a manner that a sync signal S, and transmission signals of a, b, and c channels are transmitted by time slots <b>781</b>a, <b>781</b>b, <b>781</b>c, and <b>781</b>d at a frequency B.
0592The present invention, which is characterized by a multi-level, e.g. 64 SRQAM, signal transmission system, allows to have three-level data consisting of D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>, and D<sub>3 </sub>of 2 bit/Hz as shown in FIG. <b>119</b>(b). As both the A<sub>1 </sub>and A<sub>2 </sub>data are transmitted by 16 SRQAM, their time slots have two times the data rate as shown by slots <b>782</b>b and <b>782</b>c and <b>783</b>b and <b>783</b>c. It means the same quality sound can be transmitted half the time. Accordingly, a time width of respective time slots <b>782</b><b>782</b>b and <b>782</b>c becomes halved. In this manner, two times the transmission capacity can be acquired at the two-level region <b>776</b>c shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 118</figref>, i.e. at the vicinity of the base station.
0593In the same way, time slots <b>782</b>g and <b>783</b>g carry out the transmission/reception of E<b>1</b> data by use of a 64 SRQAM signal. As the transmission capacity is three times, one time slot can be used for three channels of E<sub>1</sub>, E<sub>2</sub>, and E<sub>3</sub>. This would be used for an area further close to the base station. Thus, up to three times the communication capacity can be obtained at the same frequency band. An actual transmission efficiency, however, would be reduced to 90%. It is desirable for enhancing the effect of the present invention to coincide the transmission amount distribution according to the present invention with the regional distributution of the actual traffic amount as perfect as possible.
0594In fact, an actual urban area consists of a crowded building district and a greenbelt zone surrounding this building area. Even an actual suburb area consists of a residential district and fields or a forest surrounding this residential district. These urban and suburb areas resemble the distribution of the TF diagram. Thus, the application of the present invention will be effective.
0595<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 120</figref> is a diagram showing time slots by the TDMA method, wherein FIG. <b>120</b>(a) shows a conventional method and FIG. <b>120</b>(b) shows the present invention. The conventional method uses time slots <b>786</b>a and <b>786</b>b for transmission to portable phones of A and B channels at the same frequency and time slots <b>787</b>a and <b>787</b>b for transmission from the same, as shown in FIG. <b>120</b>(a).
0596On the contrary, 16 SRQAM mode of the present invention uses a time slot <b>788</b>a for reception of A<sub>1 </sub>channel and a time slot <b>788</b>c for transmission to A1 channels as shown in FIG. <b>1</b><b>20</b>(b)<b>120</b>(b). A width of the time slot becomes approximately ½. In case of 64 SRQAM mode, a time slot <b>788</b>i is used for reception of D<sub>1 </sub>channel and a time slot <b>7881</b> is used for transmission to D<sub>1 </sub>channel. A width of the time slot becomes approximately ⅓.
0597In order to save electric power, a transmission of E<sub>1 </sub>channel is executed by use of a normal 4 SRQAM time slot <b>788</b> r while reception of E1 channel is executed by use of a 16 SRQAM time slot <b>788</b>p being a ½ time slot. Transmission power is surely suppressed, although communication cost may increase due to a long occupation time. This will be effective for a small and light portable telephone equipped with a small battery or when the battery is almost worn out. As is described in the foregoing description, the present invention makes it possible to determine the distribution of transmission capacity so as to coincide with an actual traffic distribution, thereby increasing substantial transmission capacity. Furthermore, the present invention allows base stations or terminal stations to freely select one among two or three transmission capacities. If the frequency utilization efficiency is lowered, power consumption will be decreased. If the frequency utilization efficiency is selected higher, communication cost will be saved. Moreover, adoption of a 4 SRQAM having smaller capacity will simplify the circuitry and reduce the size and cost of the telephone. As explained in the previous embodiments, one characteristics of the present invention is that compatibility is maintained among all of associated stations. In this manner, the present invention not only increases transmission capacity but allows to provide customers a wide variety of series from a super mini telephone to a high performance telephone.
EMBODIMENT 9
0598Hereinafter, a ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described referring to the drawings. The ninth embodiment employs this invention in an OFDM transmission system. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 123</figref> is a block diagram of aan OFDM transmitter/receiver, and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 124</figref> is a diagram showing a principle of an OFDM anion. An OFDM is one of FDM and has a better efficiency in frequency utilization as compared with a general FDM, because an OFDM sets adjacent two carriers to be quadrate with each other. Furthermore, OFDM can bear multipath obstructions such as ghosts and, therefore, may be applied in the future to the digital music broadcasting or digital TV broadcasting.
0599As shown in the principle diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 124</figref>, OFDM converts an input signal by a serial to parallel converter <b>791</b> into a data being disposed on a frequency axis <b>793</b> at intervals of 1/ts, so as to produce subchannels <b>794</b>a<sup>˜</sup><b>94</b>e<b>794</b>a-<b>794</b>e. This signal is inversely FFT converted by a modulator <b>4</b> having an inverse FFT <b>40</b> into a signal on a time axis <b>79</b><sup>˜</sup><b>9</b><b>799</b>to produce a transmission signal <b>795</b>. This inverse FFT signal is transmitted during an effective symbol period <b>796</b> of the time period ts. A guard interval <b>797</b> having an amount tg is provided between symbol periods.
0600A transmitting/receiving action of HDTV signal in accordance with this ninth embodiment will be explained referring to the block diagram of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 123</figref>, which shows a hybrid OFDM-CCDM system. An inputted HDTV signal is separated by a video encoder <b>401</b> into three-levelthree-levels, a low frequency band D<sub>1-1</sub>, a medium-low frequency band D<sub>1-2</sub>, and a high-medium-low frequency band D<sub>2</sub>, video signals, and fed into an input section.
0601In a first data stream input <b>743</b>, D<sub>1-1 </sub>signal is ECC encoded with high code gain and D<sub>1-2 </sub>signal is ECC coded with a normal code gain. A TDM <b>743</b> performs time division multiplexing of D<sub>1-1 </sub>and D<sub>1-2 </sub>signals to produce a D<sub>1 </sub>signal, which is then fed to a D<sub>1 </sub>serial to parallel converter <b>791</b>d in a modulator <b>852</b>a. D<sub>1 </sub>signal consists of n pieces of parallel data, which are inputted into first inputs of n pieces of C-CDM modulator <b>4</b>a, <b>4</b>b,—respectively.
0602On the other hand, the high frequency band signal D<sub>2 </sub>is fed into a second data stream input <b>744</b> of the input section <b>742</b>, in which D<sub>2 </sub>signal is ECC (Error Correction Code) encoded in an ECC <b>744</b>a and then Trellis encoded in a Trellis encoder <b>744</b>b. Thereafter, the D<sub>2 </sub>signal is supplied to a D<sub>2 </sub>serial to parallel converter <b>791</b>b of the modulator <b>852</b>a and converted into n pieces of parallel data, which are inputted into second inputs of the n pieces of C-CDM modulator <b>4</b>a, <b>4</b>b,—respectively.
0603The C-CDM modulators <b>4</b>a, <b>4</b>b, <b>4</b>c—respectively producesproduce 16 SRQAM signal on the basis of D<sub>1 </sub>data of the first data stream input and D<sub>2 </sub>data of the second data stream input. These n pieces of C-CDM modulator respectively hashave a carrier different from each other. As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 124</figref>, carriers <b>79</b><b>4</b>a<b>794</b>a, <b>794</b>b, <b>794</b>c,—are arrayed on the frequency axis <b>793</b> so that adjacent two carriers are 90°-out-of-phase with each other. Thus C-CDM modulated n pieces of modulated signal are fed into the inverse FFT circuit <b>40</b> and mapped from the frequency axis dimension <b>793</b> to the time axis dimension <b>790</b><b>779</b>. Thus, time signals <b>796</b>a, <b>796</b>b—, having an effective symbol length ts, are produced. There is provided a guard interval zone <b>797</b>a of Tg seconds between the effective symbol time zones <b>796</b>a and <b>796</b>b, in order to reduce multipath obstruction. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 129</figref> is a graph showing a relationship between time axis and signal level. The guard time Tg of the guard interval band <b>797</b>a is determined by taking account of multipath affection and usage of signal. By setting the guard time Tg longer than the multipath affected time, e.g. TV ghost, modulated signals from the inverse FFT circuit <b>40</b> are converted by a parallel to serial converter <b>4</b>e into one signal and, then, transmitted from a transmitting circuit <b>5</b> as an RF signal.
0604Next, an action of a receiver <b>43</b> will be described. A received signal, shown as time-base symbol signal <b>796</b>e of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 124</figref>, is fed into an input section <b>24</b> of FIG. <b>123</b>. Then, the received signal is converted into a digital signal in a demodulator <b>852</b>b and further changed into Fourier coefficients in a FFT <b>40</b>a. Thus, the signal is mapped from the time axis <b>799</b> to the frequency axis <b>793</b>a as shown in FIG. <b>124</b>. That is, the time-base symbol signal is converted into frequency-base carriers <b>794</b>a, <b>794</b>b,—. As these carriers are in quadrature relationship with each other, it is possible to separate respective modulated signals. FIG. <b>125</b>(b) shows thus demodulated 16 SRQAM signal, which is then fed to respective C-CDM demodulators <b>45</b>a, <b>45</b>b,—of a C-CDM demodulator <b>45</b>, in which demodulated 16 SRQAM signal is demodulated into multi-level sub signals D<sub>1</sub>, D<sub>2</sub>. These sub signals D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>are further demodulated by a D<sub>1 </sub>parallel to serial converter <b>852</b>a and a D<sub>2 </sub>parallel to serial converter <b>852</b>b into original D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>signals.
0605Since the signal transmission system is of C-CDM multi-level shown in <b>125</b>(b), both D<sub>1 </sub>and D<sub>2 </sub>signals will be demodulated under better receiving condition but only D<sub>1 </sub>signal will be demodulated under worse, e.g. low C/N rate, receiving condition. Demodulated D<sub>1 </sub>signal is demodulated in an output section <b>757</b>. As D<sub>1-1 </sub>signal has higher ECC code gain as compared with the D<sub>1-2 </sub>signal, an error signal of the D<sub>1-1 </sub>signal is reproduced even under worse receiving condition.
0606The D<sub>1-1 </sub>signal is converted by a <b>1</b>-<b>1</b> video decoder <b>402</b>c into a low frequency band signal and outputted as an LDTV, and the D<sub>1-2 </sub>signal is converted by a <b>1</b>-<b>2</b> video decoder <b>402</b>d into a medium frequency band signal and outputted as EDTV.
0607The D<sub>2 </sub>signal is Trellis decoded by a Trellis decoder <b>75</b><b>9</b>b<b>759</b>b and converted by a second video decoder <b>402</b>b into a high frequency band signal and outputted as an HDTV signal. Namely, an LDTV signal is outputted in case of the low frequency band signal only. An EDTV signal of a wide NTSC grade is outputted if the medium frequency band signal is added to the low frequency band signal, and an HDTV signal is produced by adding low, medium, and high frequency band signals. As well as the previous embodiment, a TV signal having a picture quality depending on a receiving C/N rate can be received. Thus, the ninth embodiment realizes a novel multi-level signal transmission system by combining an OFDM and a C-CDM, which was not obtained by the OFDM alone.
0608An OFDM is certainly strong against multipath such as TV ghost because the guard time Tg can absorb an interference signal of multipath. Accordingly, the OFDM is applicable to the digital TV broadcasting for automotive vehicle TV receivers. Meanwhile, no OFDM signal is received when the C/N rate is less than a predetermined value because its signal transmission pattern is nonnot of a multi-level type.
0609However the present invention can solve this disadvantage by combining the OFDM with the C-CDM, thus realizing a graditionalgradational degradation depending on the C/N rate in a video signal reception without being disturbed by multipath.
0610When a TV signal is received in a compartment of a vehicle, not only the reception is disturbed by multipath but the C/N rate is deteriorated. Therefore, the broadcast service area of a TV broadcast station will not be expanded as expected if the countermeasure is only for multipath.
0611On the other hand, a reception of TV signal of at least LDTV grade will be ensured by the combination with the multi-level transmission C-CDM even if the C/N rate is fairly deteriorated. As a picture plane size of an automotive vehicle TV is normally less than 10 inches, a TV signal of an LDTV grade will provide a satisfactory picture quality. Thus, the LDTV grade service area of automotive vehicle TV will be largely expanded. If an OFDM is used in an entire frequency band of HDTV signal, present semiconductor technologies cannot prevent circuitry scale from increasing so far.
0612Now, an OFDM method of transmitting only D<sub>1-1 </sub>of low frequency band TV signal will be explained below. As shown in a block diagram in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 138</figref>, a medium frequency band component D<sub>1-2 </sub>and a high frequency band component D<sub>2 </sub>of an HDTV signal are multiplexed in C-CDM modulator <b>4</b>a, and then transmitted at a frequency band A through an FDM <b>40</b>d.
0613On the other hand, a signal received by a receiver <b>43</b> is first of all frequency separated by an FDM <b>40</b>e and, then, demodulated by a C-CDM demodulator <b>4</b>b of the present invention. Thereafter, thus C-CDM demodulated signal is reproduced into medium and high frequency components of HDTV in the same way as in FIG. <b>123</b>. An operation of a video decoder <b>402</b> is identical to that of embodiments 1, 2, and 3 and will not be explained in greater detail.
0614Meanwhile, the D<sub>1-1 </sub>signal, a low frequency band signal of MPEG 1 grade of HDTV, is converted by a serial to parallel converter <b>791</b> into a parallel signal and fed to an OFDM modulator <b>852</b>c, which executes QPSK or 16 QAM modulation. Subsequently, the D<sub>1-1 </sub>signal is converted by an inverse FFT <b>40</b> into a time-base signal and transmitted at a frequency band B through a FDM <b>40</b>d.
0615On the other hand, a signal received by the receiver <b>43</b> is frequency separated in the FDM <b>40</b>e and then converted into a number of frequency-base signals in an FFT <b>40</b>a of an OFDM modulatordemodulator <b>852</b>d. Thereafter, frequency-base signals are demodulated in respective demodulators <b>4</b>a, <b>4</b>b,—and are fed into a parallel to serial converter <b>882</b>a, wherein a D<sub>1-1 </sub>signal is demodulated. Thus, a D<sub>1-1 </sub>signal of LDTV grade is outputted from the receiver <b>43</b>.
0616In this manner, only an LDTV signal is OFDM modulated in the multi-level signal transmission. The method of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 138</figref> makes it possible to provide a complicated OFDM circuit only for an LDTV signal. A bit rate of LDTV signal is 1/20 of that of an HDTV. Therefore, the circuit scale of the OFDM will be reduced to 1/20, which results in an outstanding reduction of overall circuit scale.
0617An OFDM signal transmission system is strong against multipath and will soon be applied to a moving station, such as a portable TV, an automotive vehicle TV, or a digital music broadcast receiver, which is exposed under strong and variable multipath obstruction. For such usages a small picture size of less than 10 inches, 4 to 8 inches, is the mainstream. It will be thus guessed that the OFDM modulation of a high resolution TV signal such as HDTV or EDTV will bring less effect. In other words, the reception of a TV signal of LDTV grade would be sufficient for an automotive vehicle TV.
0618On the contrary, multipath is constant at a fixed station such as a home TV. Therefore, a countermeasure against multipath is relatively easy. Less effect will be brought to such a fixed station by OFDM unless it is in a ghost area. Using OFDM for medium and high frequency band components of HDTV is not advantageous in view of present circuit scale of OFDM which is still large.
0619Accordingly, the method of the present invention, in which OFDM is used only for a low frequency band TV signal as sownshown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 138</figref>, can widely reduce the circuit scale of the OFDM to less than 1/10 without losing inherent OFDM effect capable of largely reducing multiple obstruction of LDTV when received at a mobile station such as an automotive vehicle.
0620Although the OFDM modulation of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 138</figref> is performed only for D<sub>1-1 </sub>signal, it is also possible to modulate both D<sub>1-1 </sub>and D<sub>1-1</sub>D<sub>1-2 </sub>by OFDM. In such a case, a C-CDM two-level signal transmission is used for transmission of D<sub>1-1 </sub>and D<sub>1-2</sub>. Thus, a multi-level broadcasting being strong against multipath will be realized for a vehicle such as an automotive vehicle. Even in a vehicle, the gradational graduation will be realized in such a manner that LDTV and SDTV signals are received with picture qualities depending on receiving signal level or antenna sensitivity.
0621The multi-level signal transmission according to the present invention is feasible in this manner and produces various effects as previously described. Furthermore, if the multi-level signal transmission of the present invention is incorporated with an OFDM, it will become possible to provide a system strong against multipath and to alter data transmission grade in accordance with receivable signal level change.
0622FIG. <b>126</b>(a) shows another method of realizing the multi-level signal transmission system, wherein the subchannels <b>794</b>a-<b>794</b>c of the OFDM are assigned to a first layer <b>801</b>a and the subchannels <b>794</b>d-<b>794</b>f are assigned to a second layer <b>801</b>b. There is provided a frequency guard zone <b>802</b>a of f<sub>g </sub>between these two, first and second, layers. FIG. <b>126</b>(b) shows an electric power difference <b>802</b>b of Pg which is provided to differentiate the transmission power of the first and second layers <b>801</b>a and <b>801</b>b.
0623Utilization of this differentiation makes it possible to increase electric power of the first layer <b>801</b>a in the range not obstructing the analogue TV broadcast service as shown in FIG. <b>108</b>(d) previously described. In this case, a threshold value of the C/N ratio capable of receiving the first layer <b>801</b>a becomes lower than that for the second layer <b>801</b>b as shown in FIG. <b>108</b>(e). Accordingly, the first layer <b>801</b>a can be received even in a low signal-level area or in a large-noise area. Thus, a two-layer signal transmission is realized as shown in FIG. <b>147</b>. This is referred to as Power-Weighted-OFDM system (i.e. PW-OFDM) in this specification. If this PW-OFDM system is combined with the C-CDM system previously explained, three layers will be realized as shown in FIG. <b>108</b>(e) and, accordingly, the signal receivable area will be correspondingly expanded.
0624<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 144</figref> shows a specific circuit, wherein the first layer data passing through the first data stream circuit <b>791</b> a is modulated into the carriers f<sub>1</sub>-f<sub>3 </sub>by the modulators <b>4</b>a-<b>4</b>c having large amplitude and, then, are OFDM modulated in the inverse FFT <b>40</b>. On the contrary, the second layer data passing through the second data stream circuit <b>791</b>b is modulated into the carriers f<sub>6</sub>-f<sub>8 </sub>by the modulators <b>4</b>d-<b>4</b>f having ordinary amplitude and, then, are OFDM modulated in the inverse FFT <b>40</b>. Then, these OFDM modulated signals are transmitted from the transmit circuit <b>5</b>.
0625A signal received by the receiver <b>43</b> is separated into several signals having carriers of f<sub>1</sub>-f<sub>n </sub>through the FFT <b>40</b>a. The carriers f<sub>1</sub>-f<sub>3 </sub>are demodulated by the demodulators <b>45</b>a-<b>45</b>c to reproduce the first data stream D<sub>1</sub>, i.e. the first layer <b>801</b>a. On the other hand, the carriers f<sub>6</sub>-f<sub>8 </sub>are demodulated by the demodulators <b>45</b>d-<b>45</b>f to reproduce the second data stream D<sub>2</sub>, i.e. the second layer <b>801</b>b.
0626The first layer <b>801</b>a has so large electrical power that it can be received even in a weak-signal area. In this manner, the PW-OFDM system realizes the two-layer multi-level signal transmission. If this PW-OFDM is combined with the C-CDM, it will become possible to provide 3-4 layers. As the circuit of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 144</figref> is identical with the circuit of <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 123</figref> in the remaining operations and, therefore, will not be explained in greater detail.
0627Next, a method of realizing a multi-level signal transmission in Time-Weighted-OFDM (i.e. TW-OFDM) in accordance with the present invention will be explained. Although the OFDM System is accompanied with the guard time zone t<sub>g </sub>as previously described, adverse affects of ghosts will be eliminated if the delay time t<sub>M </sub>of the ghost, i.e. multipath, signal satisfies the requirement of t<sub>M</sub><t<sub>8</sub>. The delay time t<sub>M </sub>will be relatively small, for example in the range of several microsoundsmicroseconds, in a fixed station such as a TV receiver used for home use. Furthermore, as its value is constant, cancellation of ghosts will be relatively easily done. On the contrary, reflected waves will increase in case of a mobile station such as a vehicle TV receiver. Therefore, the delay time t<sub>M </sub>becomes relatively large, for example in the range of several tens microsoundmicrosecond. Furthermore, the magnitude of t<sub>M </sub>varies in response to the running movement of the vehicle. Thus, cancellation of ghosts tends to be difficult. Hence, the multi-level signal transmission is key or essential for such a mobile station TV receiver in order to eliminate adverse affection of multipath.
0628The multi-level signal transmission in accordance with the present invention will be explained below. A symbol contained in the subcannelsubchannel layer A can be intensified against the ghosts by setting a guard time t<sub>ga </sub>of the layer A to be larger than a guard time t<sub>gb </sub>of the layer B as shown in FIG. <b>146</b>. In this manner, the multi-layer signal transmission can be realized against multipath by use of weighting of guard time. This system is referred to as Guard-Time-Weighted-OFDM (i.e. QTW-OFDM).
0629If the symbol number of the symbol time Ts is not different in the layer A and in the layer B, a symbol time t<sub>sa </sub>of the layer A is set to be largersmaller than a symbol time t<sub>sb </sub>of the layer B. With this differentiation, a carrier width Δfa of the carrier A becomes larger than a carrier width Δfb of the carrier B. (Δfa>Δfb)(Δfa<Δfb) Therefore, the error rate becomes lower in the demodulation of the symbol of the layer A compared with the demodulation of the symbol of the layer B. Thus, the differentiation of the layer A and B in the weighting of the symbol time Ts can realize a two-layer signal transmission against multipath. This system is referred to as Carrier-Spacing-Weighted-OFDM (i.e. CSW-OFDM).
0630By realizing the two-layer signal transmission based on the GTW-OFDM, wherein a low-resolution TV signal is transmitted by the layer A and a high-frequency component is transmitted by the layer B, the vehicle TV receiver can stably receive the low-resolution TV signal regardless of tough ghost. Furthermore, the multi-level signal transmission with respect to the C/N ratio can be realized by differentiating the symbol time t<sub>s </sub>based on the CSW-OFDM between the layers A and B. If this CSW-OFDM is combined with the GTW-OFDM, the signal reception in the vehicle TV receiver can be further stabilized. High resolution is not normally required to the vehicle TV or the portable TV.
0631As the time ratio of the symbol time including a low-resolution TV signal is small, an overall transmission efficiency will not decrease so much even if the guard time is enlarged. Accordingly, using the GTW-OFDM of the present invention for suppressing multipath by laying emphasis on the low-resolution TV signal will realize the multi-layer type TV broadcast service wherein the mobile station such as the portable or vehicle TV receiver can be compatible with the stationary station such as the home TV without substantially lowering the transmission efficiency. If combined with the CSW-OFDM or the C-CDM as described previously, the multi-layer to the C/N ratio can be also realized. Thus, the signal reception in the mobile station will be further stabilized.
0632An affection of the multipath will be explained in more detail. In case of multipath <b>810</b>a, <b>810</b>b, <b>810</b>c, and <b>810</b>d having shorter delay time as shown in FIG. <b>145</b>(a), the signals of both the first and second layers can be received and therefore the HDTV signal can be demodulated. On the contrary, in case of multipath <b>811</b>a, <b>811</b>b, <b>811</b>c, and <b>811</b>d having longer delay time as shown in FIG. <b>145</b>(b), the B signal of the second layer cannot be received since its guard time t<sub>gb </sub>is not sufficiently long. However, the A signal of the first layer can be received without being bothered by the multipath since its guard time t<sub>ga </sub>is sufficiently long. As described above, the B signal includes the high-frequency component of TV signal. The A signal includes the low-frequency component of TV signal. Accordingly, the vehicle TV can reproduce the LDTV signal. Furthermore, as the symbol time Tsa is set larger than symbol time Tsb, the first layer is strong against deterioration of C/N ratio.
0633Such a discrimination of the guard time and the symbol time is effective to realize two-dimensional multi-layer signal transmission of the OFDM in a simple manner. If the discrimination of guard time is combined with the C-CDM in the circuit shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 123</figref>, the multi-layer signal transmission effective against both multipath and deterioration of C/N ratio will be realized.
0634Next, a specific example will be described below.
0635The smaller the D/U ratio of the receiving signal becomes, the larger the multipath delay time T<sub>M </sub>becomes. Because, the reflected wave increases compared with the direct wave. For example, as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 148</figref>, if the D/U ratio is smaller than 30 dB, the delay time T<sub>M </sub>exceeds 30 usμs because of increase of the reflected wave. Therefore, as can be understood from <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 148</figref>, it will become possible to receive the signal even in the worst condition if the Tg is set to be larger than 50 usμs.
0636Accordingly, as shown in detail in FIGS. <b>149</b>(a) and <b>149</b>(b), three groups of first <b>801</b>a, second <b>801</b>b, and third <b>801</b> c<b>801</b>c layers are assigned in a 2 ms period of 1 sec TV signal. The guard times <b>797</b>a, <b>797</b>b, and <b>797</b>c, i.e. Tga, Tgb, and Tgc, of these three groups are weighted to be, for example, 50 microsoundsmicroseconds, <b>5 microsoundsmicroseconds</b>, and <b>1 microsoundmicrosecond</b>, respectively, as shown in FIG. <b>149</b>(c). Thus, three-layer signal transmission effective to the multipath will be realized as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 150</figref>, wherein three layers <b>801</b>a, <b>801</b>b, and <b>801</b>c are provided.
0637If the GTW-OFDM is applied to ass the picture quality, it is doubtless
0638At the same time, the multi-layer signal transmission effective to C/N ratio can be realized. By combining the CSW-OFDM and the CSW-OFDM, a two-dimensional multi-layer signal transmission is realized with respect to the multipath and the C/N ratio as shown in FIG. <b>151</b>. As described previously, it is possible to combine the CSW-OFDM and the C-CDM of the present invention for preventing the overall transmission efficiency from being lowered. In the first, <b>1</b>-<b>2</b>, and <b>1</b>-<b>3</b> layers <b>801</b>a, <b>851</b>a, and <b>851</b>az, the LDTV grade signal can be stably received by, for example, the vehicle TV receiver subjected to the large multipath T<sub>M </sub>and low C/N ratio. In the second and 2-3 layers <b>801</b>b and <b>851</b>b, the standard-resolution SDTV grade signal can be received by the fixed or stationary station located, for example, in the fringe of the service area which is generally subjected to the lower C/N ratio and ghost. In the third layer <b>801</b>c which occupies more than half of the service area, the HDTV grade signal can be received since the C/N ratio is high and the ghost is less because of large direct wave. In this manner, a two-dimensional multi-layer broadcast service effective to both the C/N ratio and the multipath can be realized by the combination of the GTW-OFDM and the C-CDM or the combination of the GTW-OFDM and the CSW-C-CDM in accordance with the present invention. thusThus, the present invention realizes a two-dimensional, matrix type, multi-layer signal transmission system effective to both the C/N ratio and the <b>194</b> multipath, which has not ever been realized by the prior art technologies.
0639A timing chart of a three level (HDTV, SDTV, LDTV) television signal in a two-dimensional multilevel broadcast of three C/N levels and three multipath levels is shown in FIG. <b>152</b>. As shown in the figure, the LDTV signal is positioned in slot <b>796</b>a<b>1</b> of the first level of levellayer A, the level with the greatest resistance to multipath interference; the SDTV synchronization signal, address signal, and other important high priority signals are positioned in slot <b>796</b>a<b>2</b>, which has the next greatest resistance to multipath interference, and slot <b>796</b>b<b>1</b>, which has strong resistance to C/N deterioration. The SDTV common signal, i.e., low priority signals, and HDTV high priority signals are positioned in levels <b>2</b> and <b>3</b> of level B. SDTV, EDTV, HDTV, and other high frequency component television signals are positioned in levels <b>1</b>, <b>2</b>, and <b>3</b> of level C.
0640As the resistance to C/N deterioration and multipath interference increases, the transmission rate drops, causing the TV signal resolution to drop, and achieving the three-dimensional graceful degradation effect shown in FIG. <b>153</b> and unobtainable with conventional methods. As shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 153</figref>, the three-dimensional multilevel broadcast structure of the invention is achieved with three parameters: C/N ratio, multipath delay time, and the transmission rate. The present embodiment has been described using the example of a two-dimensional multilevel broadcast structure obtained by combining GTW-OFDM of the invention with C-CDM of the invention as previously described, or combining GTW-OFDM, CSW-C-CDM, but other two-dimensional multilevel broadcast structures can be obtained by combining GTW-OFDM and power-weighted OFDM, or GTW-OFDM with other C/N ratio multilevel transmission methods.
0641<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 154</figref> is obtained by transmitting the power of carriers <b>794</b>a, <b>794</b>c, and <b>794</b>e with less weighting compared with carriers <b>794</b>b, <b>794</b>d, and <b>794</b>f, achieving a two level power-weighted OFDM. Two levels are obtained by power weighting carriers <b>795</b>a and <b>795</b>c, which are perpendicular to carrier <b>794</b>a, to carriers <b>795</b>b and <b>795</b>d. While a total of four levels are obtained, the embodiment having only two levels is shown in FIG. <b>154</b>. As shown in the figure, because the carrier frequencies are distributed, interference with other analog transmissions on the same frequency band is dispersed, and there is minimal adverse effect.
0642By using a time positioning varying the time width of guard times <b>797</b>a, <b>797</b>b, and <b>797</b>c for each symbol <b>796</b>a, <b>796</b>b, and <b>796</b>c as shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 155</figref>, three-level multipath multilevel transmission can be achieved. Using the time positioning shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 155</figref>, the A-, B-, and C-level data is distributed on the time axis. As a result, even if burst noise produced at a specific time occurs, data destruction can be prevented and the TV signal can be stably demodulated by interleaving the data from the different layers. In particular, by interleaving with the A level data distributed, interference from burst noise generated by the ignition systems of other vehicles can be significantly reduced in mobile TV receivers.
0643Block diagrams of a specific ECC encoder <b>744</b>j and a specific ECC decoder <b>749</b>j<b>759</b>j are shown in FIG. <b>160</b>a and <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 160b</figref>, respectively. <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 167</figref> is a block diagram of the deinterleaver <b>936</b>b. The interleave table <b>954</b> processed in the deinterleave RAM <b>936</b>a of the deinterleaver <b>936</b>b is shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 168a</figref>, and interleave distance L<b>1</b> is shown in FIG. <b>168</b>b.
0644Burst noise interference can be reduced by interleaving the data in this way. By using a 4-level VSB, 8-level VSB, or 16-level VSB transmission apparatus as described in embodiments 4, 5, and 6, respectively, and shown in the VSB receiver block diagram (<figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 161</figref>) and the VSB transmitter block diagram (FIG. <b>162</b>), or by using a QAM or PSK transmission apparatus as described in embodiments 1 and 2, respectively, burst noise interference can be reduced, and television reception with very low noise levels can be achieved in ground station broadcasting.
0645By using 3-level broadcasting by means of the method shown in <figref idref="DRAWINGS">FIG. 155</figref>, LDTV grade television reception by mobile receivers, including mobile TV receivers in motor vehicles and hand-held portable television sets, can be stabilized because level A has the effect of reducing burst noise interference in addition to multipath interference and C/N ratio deterioration.
0646The multi-level signal transmission method of the present invention is intended to increase the utilization of frequencies but may be suited for not all the transmission systems since causing some type receivers to be declined in the energy utilization. It is a good idea for use with a satellite communications system for selected subscribers to employ most advanced transmitters and receivers designed for best utilization of applicable frequencies and energy. Such a specific purpose signal transmission system will not be bound by the present invention.
0647The present invention will be advantageous for use with a satellite or terrestrial broadcast service which is essential to run in the same standards for as long as 50 years. During the service period, the broadcast standards must not be altered but improvements will be provided time to time corresponding to up-to-date technological achievements. Particularly, the energy for signal transmission will surely be increased on any satellite. Each TV station should provide a compatible service for guaranteeing TV program signal reception to any type receivers ranging from today's common ones to future advanced ones. The signal transmission system of the present invention can provide a compatible broadcast service of both the existing NTSC and HDTV systems and also, ensure a future extension to match mass datedata transmission.
0648The present invention concerns much on the frequency utilization than the energy utilization. The signal receiving sensitivity of each receiver is arranged differentdifferently depending on a signal state level to be received so that the transmitting power of a transmitter needs not be increased largely. Hence, existing satellites which offer a small energy for reception and transmission of a signal can best be used with the system of the present invention. The system is also arranged for performing the same standards corresponding to an increase in the transmission energy in the future and offering the compatibility between old and new type receivers. In addition, the present invention will be more advantageous for use with the satellite broadcast standards.
0649The multi-level signal transmission method of the present invention is more preferably employed for terrestrial TV broadcast service in which the energy utilization is not crucial, as compared with satellite broadcast service. The results are such that the signal attenuating regions in a service area which are attributed to a conventional digital HDTV broadcast system are considerably reduced in extension and also, the compatibility of an HDTV receiver or display with the existing NTSC system is obtained. Furthermore, the service area is substantially increased so that program suppliers and sponsors can appreciate more viewers. Although the embodiments of the present invention refer to 16 and 32 QAM procedures, other modulation techniques including 64, 128, and 256 QAM will be employed with equal success. Also, multiple PSK, ASK, and FSK techniques will be applicable as described with the embodiments.
0650A combination of the TDM with the SRQAM of the present invention has been described in the above. However, the SRQAM of the present invention can be combined also with any of the FDM, CDMA and frequency dispersal communications systems.
Contents14
1 sheet
Sheet 1
Every citation, both waysCites: the store holds 102 of 103
| Document | Relation | Office | Cited during |
|---|---|---|---|
| EP0031193A1 | Cites | European Patent Office (EPO) | Applicant |
| EP0122805A2 | Cites | European Patent Office (EPO) | Applicant |
| CN1499725A | Cites | China | Applicant |
| EP1528854A1 | Cites | European Patent Office (EPO) | Applicant |
| EP1529838A1 | Cites | European Patent Office (EPO) | Applicant |
| CN1569334A | Cites | China | Applicant |
| US2005058633A1 | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US2005084750A1 | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US2005092292A1 | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| CA2095435A1 | Cites | Canada | Applicant |
| CN2627574Y | Cites | China | Applicant |
| US3824548A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US3909721A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US3959726A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4003002A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4048572A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4053713A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4077021A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4227152A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4267592A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4271527A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4303939A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4303941A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4309726A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4525846A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4535352A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4564858A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4581639A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4597090A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4601045A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4630287A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4636876A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4751478A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4769819A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4794447A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4800426A | Cites | United States of America | Search report |
| US4817192A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4855692A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4873701A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4891806A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4903125A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4912706A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4914655A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4918437A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4937844A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4940954A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US4958360A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5007088A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5018198A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5023889A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5029003A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5038219A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5038402A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5050188A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5063445A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5063452A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5086340A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5087975A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5105442A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5115453A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5124852A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5128758A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5134464A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5136380A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5142353A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5146335A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5148422A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5164963A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5166924A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5168509A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5170413A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5181112A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5197061A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5210770A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5214656A | Cites | United States of America | Search report |
| US5218436A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5218622A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5243629A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5267021A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5282019A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5291289A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5311547A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5311550A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5377051A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5398073A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5400084A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5452015A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5481412A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5519730A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5555275A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5561468A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5565926A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5565932A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5576902A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5598220A | Cites | United States of America | Search report |
| US5638112A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5802241A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5819000A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5892879A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
| US5999569A | Cites | United States of America | Applicant |
1,166 members in 18 offices
Priority claims55
| Document | Office | Kind | Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| 0362798 | Japan | – | |
| 6279891 | Japan | A | |
| 6279891 | Japan | A | |
| 0395813 | Japan | – | |
| 9581391 | Japan | A | |
| 9581391 | Japan | A | |
| 03155650 | Japan | – | |
| 15565091 | Japan | A | |
| 15565091 | Japan | A | |
| 03182236 | Japan | – | |
| 18223691 | Japan | A | |
| 18223691 | Japan | A | |
| 0460739 | Japan | – | |
| 6073992 | Japan | A | |
| 6073992 | Japan | A | |
| 85762792 | United States of America | A | |
| 85762792 | United States of America | A | |
| 05132984 | Japan | – | |
| 13298493 | Japan | A | |
| 13298493 | Japan | A | |
| 05261612 | Japan | – | |
| 26161293 | Japan | A | |
| 26161293 | Japan | A | |
| 05349972 | Japan | – | |
| 34997293 | Japan | A | |
| 34997293 | Japan | A | |
| 0679668 | Japan | – | |
| 7966894 | Japan | A | |
| 7966894 | Japan | A | |
| 24052194 | United States of America | A | |
| 24052194 | United States of America | A | |
| 67742000 | United States of America | A | |
| 03155650 | – | – | – |
| 03182236 | – | – | – |
| 0362798 | – | – | – |
| 0395813 | – | – | – |
| 0460739 | – | – | – |
| 05132984 | – | – | – |
| 05261612 | – | – | – |
| 05349972 | – | – | – |
| 0679668 | – | – | – |
| 07857627 | – | – | – |
| 08240521 | – | – | – |
| JP19910062798 | – | – | – |
| JP19910095813 | – | – | – |
| JP19910155650 | – | – | – |
| JP19910182236 | – | – | – |
| JP19920060739 | – | – | – |
| JP19930132984 | – | – | – |
| JP19930261612 | – | – | – |
| JP19930349972 | – | – | – |
| JP19940079668 | – | – | – |
| US19920857627 | – | – | – |
| US19940240521 | – | – | – |
| US20000677420 | – | – | – |
Members1,166
| Document | Office | Kind | |
|---|---|---|---|
| EP0506400A2 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A2 | |
| KR920019191A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| CN1066946A | China | A | |
| EP0506400A3 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A3 | |
| CN1075024A | China | A | |
| EP0555031A2 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A2 | |
| KR930016968A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| CA2092495A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2226489A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2331203A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2332405A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| JPH05250756A | Japan | A | |
| CN1076816A | China | A | |
| EP0562875A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| AU3552093A | Australia | A | |
| EP0564187A2 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A2 | |
| KR930020993A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| JPH05307788A | Japan | A | |
| JPH05327807A | Japan | A | |
| JPH0636387A | Japan | A | |
| CA2106919A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| EP0589709A2 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A2 | |
| CN1085680A | China | A | |
| JPH06164665A | Japan | A | |
| JPH06180888A | Japan | A | |
| CA2113842A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2113877A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2226398A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| EP0608126A2 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A2 | |
| EP0609013A2 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A2 | |
| EP0609617A2 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A2 | |
| JPH06231509A | Japan | A | |
| JPH06231510A | Japan | A | |
| KR940018833A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| CA2119983A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2259818A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2382460A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2445707A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2636575A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2652486A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2652487A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2652488A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2652596A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2652602A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2652609A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2652875A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2652876A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2652880A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2653269A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2653282A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2653289A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| EP0589709A3 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A3 | |
| EP0617531A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| AU5905294A | Australia | A | |
| KR940023243A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| CN1096389A | China | A | |
| AU655539B2 | Australia | B2 | |
| EP0637016A2 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A2 | |
| CN1098810A | China | A | |
| KR950004125A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| CN1099544A | China | A | |
| JPH0793962A | Japan | A | |
| JPH0799522A | Japan | A | |
| AU660123B2 | Australia | B2 | |
| WO9518443A1 | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) | A1 | |
| EP0637016A3 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A3 | |
| JPH07235097A | Japan | A | |
| JPH07235098A | Japan | A | |
| JPH07235099A | Japan | A | |
| JPH07249227A | Japan | A | |
| JPH07264148A | Japan | A | |
| WO9528704A1 | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) | A1 | |
| EP0555031A3 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A3 | |
| EP0608126A3 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A3 | |
| EP0609013A3 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A3 | |
| US5473584A | United States of America | A | |
| EP0564187A3 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A3 | |
| JPH07320333A | Japan | A | |
| JPH07322219A | Japan | A | |
| EP0689200A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| KR960002468B1 | Republic of Korea | B1 | |
| KR960002703B1 | Republic of Korea | B1 | |
| CN1119895A | China | A | |
| EP0706174A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| EP0689200A4 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A4 | |
| WO9616401A1 | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) | A1 | |
| US5526328A | United States of America | A | |
| CN1032099C | China | C | |
| CN1127049A | China | A | |
| JPH08212560A | Japan | A | |
| JPH08212681A | Japan | A | |
| US5555275A | United States of America | A | |
| JPH08273164A | Japan | A | |
| EP0741382A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| EP0609617A3 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A3 | |
| CN1138915A | China | A | |
| US5600672A | United States of America | A | |
| EP0766478A2 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A2 | |
| WO9714144A1 | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) | A1 | |
| WO9714146A1 | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) | A1 |
133 transactions on the USPTO file
Allowed after 2 non-final rejections, 2 final rejections and 2 RCEs.
- Non-final rejections
- 2
- Final rejections
- 2
- RCEs
- 2
- Appeals
- 0
Over time
Point at a mark for the transactionTransactions
| Event | Code | |
|---|---|---|
| Correspondence Address ChangeC.AD | C.AD | |
| Post Issue Communication - Certificate of CorrectionN423 | N423 | |
| Post Issue Communication - Certificate of CorrectionN423 | N423 | |
| Recordation of Patent Grant MailedPGM/ | PGM/ | |
| Issue Notification MailedAllowedWPIR | WPIR | |
| Receipt into PubsR1021 | R1021 | |
| Dispatch to FDCD1935 | D1935 | |
| Dispatch to FDCD1935 | D1935 | |
| Dispatch to FDCD1935 | D1935 | |
| Dispatch to FDCD1935 | D1935 | |
| Dispatch to FDCD1935 | D1935 | |
| Application Is Considered Ready for IssuePILS | PILS | |
| Issue Fee Payment VerifiedN084 | N084 | |
| Issue Fee Payment ReceivedIFEE | IFEE | |
| Reverse Issue FeeVFEE | VFEE | |
| Issue Fee Payment ReceivedIFEE | IFEE | |
| Mail Notice of AllowanceAllowedMN/=. | MN/=. | |
| Reference capture on IDSRCAP | RCAP | |
| Information Disclosure Statement consideredIDSC | IDSC | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledM844 | M844 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledWIDS | WIDS | |
| Cleared by OIPE CSRL194 | L194 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement consideredIDSC | IDSC | |
| Reference capture on IDSRCAP | RCAP | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledM844 | M844 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledWIDS | WIDS | |
| Notice of Allowance Data Verification CompletedAllowedN/=. | N/=. | |
| Cleared by OIPE CSRL194 | L194 | |
| Date Forwarded to ExaminerFWDX | FWDX | |
| Disposal for a RCE / CPA / R129AbandonedABN9 | ABN9 | |
| Case Docketed to Examiner in GAUDOCK | DOCK | |
| Cleared by OIPE CSRL194 | L194 | |
| Cleared by OIPE CSRL194 | L194 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement consideredIDSC | IDSC | |
| Reference capture on IDSRCAP | RCAP | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledM844 | M844 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledWIDS | WIDS | |
| Cleared by OIPE CSRL194 | L194 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement consideredIDSC | IDSC | |
| Reference capture on IDSRCAP | RCAP | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledM844 | M844 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledWIDS | WIDS | |
| Cleared by OIPE CSRL194 | L194 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement consideredIDSC | IDSC | |
| Request for Continued Examination (RCE)RCEX | RCEX | |
| Reference capture on IDSRCAP | RCAP | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledM844 | M844 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledWIDS | WIDS | |
| Workflow - Request for RCE - BeginBRCE | BRCE | |
| Workflow - File Sent to ContractorSENT | SENT | |
| Miscellaneous Incoming LetterLET. | LET. | |
| Information Disclosure Statement consideredIDSC | IDSC | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledM844 | M844 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledWIDS | WIDS | |
| Mail Notice of AllowanceAllowedMN/=. | MN/=. | |
| Notice of Allowance Data Verification CompletedAllowedN/=. | N/=. | |
| Date Forwarded to ExaminerFWDX | FWDX | |
| Disposal for a RCE / CPA / R129AbandonedABN9 | ABN9 | |
| Case Docketed to Examiner in GAUDOCK | DOCK | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledM844 | M844 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledWIDS | WIDS | |
| Workflow - File Sent to ContractorSENT | SENT | |
| Reference capture on IDSRCAP | RCAP | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledM844 | M844 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledWIDS | WIDS | |
| Mail-Record Petition Decision of Granted to Withdraw from IssueMP006 | MP006 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledM844 | M844 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledWIDS | WIDS | |
| Request for Continued Examination (RCE)RCEX | RCEX | |
| Workflow - Request for RCE - BeginBRCE | BRCE | |
| Petition EnteredPET. | PET. | |
| Reverse Issue FeeVFEE | VFEE | |
| Issue Fee Payment ReceivedIFEE | IFEE | |
| Mail Notice of AllowanceAllowedMN/=. | MN/=. | |
| Mail-Petition Decision - GrantedMPTGR | MPTGR | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledM844 | M844 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledWIDS | WIDS | |
| Petition EnteredPET. | PET. | |
| Notice of Allowance Data Verification CompletedAllowedN/=. | N/=. | |
| Date Forwarded to ExaminerFWDX | FWDX | |
| Response after Final ActionA.NE | A.NE | |
| Oath or Declaration Filed (Including Supplemental)C602 | C602 | |
| Mail Final Rejection (PTOL - 326)Final rejectionMCTFR | MCTFR | |
| Final RejectionFinal rejectionCTFR | CTFR | |
| Date Forwarded to ExaminerFWDX | FWDX | |
| Substitute Specification FiledC604 | C604 | |
| Response after Final ActionA.NE | A.NE | |
| Request for Extension of Time - GrantedXT/G | XT/G | |
| Incoming Letter Pertaining to the DrawingsLTDR | LTDR | |
| New or Additional Drawing FiledC614 | C614 | |
| Mail Final Rejection (PTOL - 326)Final rejectionMCTFR | MCTFR | |
| Final RejectionFinal rejectionCTFR | CTFR | |
| Date Forwarded to ExaminerFWDX | FWDX | |
| Response after Non-Final ActionA... | A... | |
| Request for Extension of Time - GrantedXT/G | XT/G | |
| New or Additional Drawing FiledC614 | C614 | |
| Incoming Letter Pertaining to the DrawingsLTDR | LTDR | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledM844 | M844 | |
| Information Disclosure Statement (IDS) FiledWIDS | WIDS | |
| Mail Non-Final RejectionNon-final rejectionMCTNF | MCTNF |
2 legal events, as the office reported them to INPADOC
Over the term
Point at a mark for the eventEvents
| Event | Code | |
|---|---|---|
| Certificate of correctionCC | CC | |
| Certificate of correctionCC | CC |
Numbers
- Publication
- RE040134
- Publication, DOCDB
- RE40134
- Publication, EPODOC
- USRE40134E
- Application
- 9677420
- Application, DOCDB
- 67742000
- Application, EPODOC
- US20000677420
Titles
- English
- Communication system
Classification
- CPC, 25
- G11B20/00086
- G11B27/034
- G11B27/105
- G11B2220/213
- G11B2220/2545
- H04L1/006
- H04L1/0065
- H04L1/007
- H04L27/02
- H04L27/04
- H04L27/183
- H04L27/2602
- H04L27/2604
- H04L27/34
- H04L27/3488
- H04L27/3854
- H04N7/015
- H04N7/54
- H04N21/234327
- H04N21/2383
- H04N21/43637
- H04N21/4382
- H04N21/440227
- H04N21/64792
- H04N21/426
- IPC, 17
- H04L5 16
- G11B20 00
- G11B23 28
- G11B27 034
- G11B27 10
- H04L1 00
- H04L27 02
- H04L27 04
- H04L27 18
- H04L27 26
- H04L27 34
- H04L27 38
- H04N5 44
- H04N7 015
- H04N7 24
- H04N7 26
- H04N7 54
- USPC, 8
- 375219000
- 375270000
- 375271000
- 375298000
- 375301000
- 375321000
- 375342000
- 375364000